Pacifica (2008) - Automobile Chrysler - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Minivan
Model Year	2008
Engine Options	3.8L V6 (200 hp) or 4.0L V6 (251 hp)
Transmission	6-speed automatic with Autostick
Fuel Capacity	20.5 gallons (78 liters)
Engine Oil Capacity (with filter)	6 quarts (5.7 liters)
Coolant Capacity	12.8 quarts (12.1 liters)
Battery	12V, maintenance-free
Fuel Type	Unleaded gasoline (87 octane recommended)
Key Features	Power windows, power door locks, remote keyless entry, power liftgate (optional), Sentry Key immobilizer, security alarm
Safety Systems	Front airbags, side curtain airbags (optional), driver inflatable knee blocker, ABS, ESP, traction control, brake assist, tire pressure monitoring
Seating Capacity	Up to 7 passengers
Maintenance Interval	Oil change every 6,000 miles or 6 months
Spare Parts	Use genuine Mopar parts; replacement keys from dealer with PIN
Warranty	3 years/36,000 miles basic, 5 years/100,000 miles powertrain

Frequently Asked Questions - Pacifica (2008) Chrysler

How do I program a new key fob for my 2008 Chrysler Pacifica?

You can program a new key fob if you have two valid keys. Insert the first valid key, turn ignition ON for 3-15 seconds, turn OFF and remove. Insert second valid key within 15 seconds, turn ON, wait for chime (about 10 seconds), turn OFF. Then insert the new blank key within 60 seconds, turn ON, wait for a single chime. The new key is programmed. Up to 8 keys can be programmed.

How does the power liftgate work on my Pacifica?

Press the liftgate button on the remote keyless entry twice within 5 seconds to open or close the power liftgate. A beep sounds 2 seconds before movement. The liftgate reverses if obstructed. It will not operate in temperatures below -12°F or above 143°F.

What is the child protection door lock and how do I use it?

The child protection lock prevents rear doors from being opened from the inside. To engage, open the rear door and insert the key into the child lock control slot, slide it upward. Repeat for the other door. To disengage, slide the control downward. Always test from inside after engaging.

How do I reset the auto-up feature for the power windows after battery disconnection?

Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and hold for 2 seconds. Then push the switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window fully and hold for 2 seconds. This restores the auto-up and anti-pinch function.

What does the Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) indicator light mean?

If the PAD light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag is turned off. This occurs when the Occupant Classification System (OCS) detects an empty seat, a child, or a small adult. If an adult is seated and the light stays on, have them reposition until the light goes out.

How do I deactivate the BeltAlert chime?

Turn ignition OFF, buckle driver's seat belt. Turn ignition ON (RUN position) and wait for seat belt warning light to turn off. Within 60 seconds, unbuckle and re-buckle the belt three times within 10 seconds, ending with belt buckled. Turn ignition OFF. A chime confirms deactivation. Repeat to reactivate.

What is the correct tire pressure for my Pacifica?

Refer to the tire and loading information placard on the driver's door pillar. Typical pressures are 32 psi front and 36 psi rear for proper load and handling. Always inflate to the recommended pressure when tires are cold.

How do I use the Sentry Key Immobilizer System?

The system automatically disables the engine if an unprogrammed key is used. A valid programmed key starts the vehicle normally. If the Vehicle Security Alarm indicator light flashes after the bulb check, an invalid key was used. Only keys programmed to your vehicle can operate it.

What should I do if the security alarm activates accidentally?

Press the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter to disarm the alarm. If the horn sounds 3 times when unlocking, check for tampering. Starting the vehicle with a programmed Sentry Key also disarms the alarm.

How do I check and add engine oil?

Park on level ground and turn off engine. Wait 5 minutes, then remove dipstick, wipe, reinsert and remove. Oil level should be between MIN and MAX marks. If low, add SAE 5W-20 or 5W-30 (API certified) through the oil filler cap. Capacity with filter is 6 quarts.

USER MANUAL Pacifica (2008) Chrysler

This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents. You are urged to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings.

When it comes to service, remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar® parts, and is interested in your satisfaction.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Consult the table of contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.

The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this owner manual:

6 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures, which could result in an accident or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures, which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through the windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.

Close-up of a car's side profile showing the dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

■ A Word About Your Keys .... 1 2

□ Ignition Key Removal....1 2

□ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ..... 1 4

□ Locking Doors With The Key ..... 1 4

■ Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped ..... 1 4

□ If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel....14

□ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock....1 4

□ Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System ..15

■ Sentry Key — If Equipped ..... 1 5

□ Replacement Keys....16

□ Customer Key Programming 17

□ General Information .....18

■ Security Alarm System — If Equipped .....18

□ Rearming Of The System — If Equipped . . . . . . 1 8

□ To Arm The System ..... 1 8

□ To Disarm The System....19

□ Security System Manual Override .....19

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

■ Illuminated Entry System ..... 2 0
■ Remote Keyless Entry 20

□ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ..... 2 1
□ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2
□ To Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped . .23
□ Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock....2 3
□ Using The Panic Alarm ..... 2 4
□ Programming Additional Transmitters ..... 2 4
□ Battery Replacement....2 4

■ Door Locks....26

□ Manual Door Locks ..... 2 6
□ Power Door Locks ..... 2 7
□ Child Protection Door Lock....30

Windows....32

□ Power Windows....3 2

■ Liftgate....3 4

□ Power Liftgate — If Equipped .....35

■ Occupant Restraints .....38

□ Lap/Shoulder Belts 39
□ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure ..... 4 5
□ Seat Belt Pretensioners....47
□ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert) 47
□ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . 4 8
□ Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) .....49
□ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . 4 9

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

□ Seat Belt Extender....4 9
□ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag .... 5 0
□ Event Data Recorder (EDR) 6 5
□ Child Restraint....67

■ Engine Break-In Recommendations ..... 7 7

■ Safety Tips....78
□ Exhaust Gas....78
□ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle....79
☐ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle....80

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place.

Three Button Key

Ignition Key Removal

Automatic Transaxle

Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position, push the key and cylinder inward, rotate the key to the LOCK position, and remove the key.

Ignition Key Positions

NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key to the right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.

NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power outlets, and removable console (if equipped), will remain active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.

WARNING!

Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don't leave the keys in the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Key-In-Ignition Reminder

A chime will sound (reminding you to remove the key) when the driver's door opens and the key is in the 'OFF' or 'ACC' positions. The chime will not sound with the key in the 'ON' position.

Locking Doors With The Key

You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the key forward. See Section 7 of this manual for door lock lubrication.

STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle without the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved no more than 1/2 turn in either direction and the key is not in the ignition switch, the steering wheel will lock.

If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel:

With the engine running, turn the steering wheel upside down, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock engages.

To Release The Steering Wheel Lock:

Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine. If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to the right or left to disengage the lock.

NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.

Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System

This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ACC, or ON positions, and the brake pedal is depressed.

SENTRY KEY — IF EQUIPPED

The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two (2) seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine.

NOTE: A key, which has not been programmed, is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle.

During normal operation, after turning on the ignition switch, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on for three (3) seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two (2) seconds.

If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.
• Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass, ^TM additional Sentry Keys, or any other transponder equipped components on the same keychain will not cause a key-related (transponder) fault unless the additional part is physically held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system.

All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

Replacement Keys

NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!

Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN number. This number is required for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one which has never been programmed and needs to be cut.

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the dealer.

Customer Key Programming

You can program new sentry keys to the system if you have two valid sentry keys by performing the following procedure:

1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the first key.

3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds a chime will sound and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key.

4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10 seconds a single chime will sound. The Theft Alarm Light will stop flashing, turn on for 3 seconds; then turn off.

The new Sentry Key has been programmed. The Keyless Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure. Repeat this procedure to program up to a total of 8 keys. If you do not have a programmed sentry key, contact your dealer for details.

NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

General Information

The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the system provides both audible and visual signals. For the first 3 minutes the horn will sound and the headlights and security telltale will flash repeatedly. For an additional 15 minutes only the headlights and security telltale will flash. The engine will run only if a valid Sentry Key is used to start the vehicle. Use of the Sentry Key will disable the alarm.

Rearming of the System — If Equipped

The security system will rearm itself after the 15 additional minutes of headlights and security telltale flashing, if the system has not been disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still present, the system will ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.

To Arm the System:

The alarm will set when you use the power door locks, or use the Keyless Entry transmitter to lock the doors. After all the doors are locked and closed the SECURITY light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the system is arming. The security light in the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm is set, the security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is armed.

NOTE: If the SECURITY light stays on continuously during vehicle operation, have the system checked by your dealer.

To Disarm the System:

Use the Keyless Entry transmitter to unlock the door. If something has triggered the system in your absence, the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors and the security lamp will flash for 30 seconds. Check the vehicle for tampering.

The Security system will also disarm, if the vehicle is started with a programmed Sentry Key. If an unprogrammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle, the engine will run for 2 seconds and then the security alarm will be initiated. To exit alarming mode, press the transmitter Unlock button, or start the vehicle with a programmed Sentry Key.

If the alarm system is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the system will remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound, and the ignition will not start the vehicle. If this occurs, disarm the system.

Tamper Alert

If the horn sounds 3 times when you unlock a front door using either a key or the Keyless Entry Transmitter, the alarm has been activated. Check the vehicle for tampering.

Security System Manual Override

The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger.

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless entry transmitter or open the doors.

The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned on.

NOTE:

• The front courtesy overhead console, door courtesy and liftgate lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position (extreme top position).
• The illuminated entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme downward position).

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate, and activate the panic alarm from distances up to about 23 feet (7 meters) using a hand held radio transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

NOTE: Inserting the key into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that transmitter; however, the buttons on the remaining transmitters will continue to work. Shifting the vehicle out of PARK disables all transmitter buttons for all keys.

Two (2) transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle (as seen below). Vehicles built with additional powered options will be equipped from the factory with corresponding buttons on the transmitters.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

Illustration of a car key with labeled buttons and a handle (no text or symbols beyond branding)

811b8b06

Keyless Entry Transmitter

To unlock the doors and liftgate:

Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter once to unlock the driver's door, or twice to unlock all doors and liftgate. When the UNLOCK button is pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate and the parking lights will flash on twice.

Remote Unlock Driver's Door 1st

The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors or driver's door only upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the following procedure:

• On electronic vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to "Remote Unlock Driver's Door 1st?" under "Use Factory Settings?" in the EVIC section of this manual.

• On non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the following steps:

• Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle.

• Press and hold the UNLOCK button on your key fob.
• Continue to hold the UNLOCK button, wait at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the LOCK button. Release both buttons at the same time.

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. This will allow you to unlock all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button.
2. To reactivate the feature, repeat this procedure.
3. If the programming procedure was unsuccessful see your authorized dealer for programming assistance.

To lock the doors and liftgate:

Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock all doors. If the ignition is OFF, when the doors are locked, the parking lights will flash on once and the horn will chirp once.

Sound Horn On Lock

Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chip once to acknowledge the lock signal. If desired, the "Sound Horn On Lock" feature can be turned on or off by using the following procedure:

• On electronic vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to "Sound Horn On Lock?" under "Use Factory Settings?" in the EVIC section of this manual.

• On non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the following steps:

• Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle.

• Press and hold the LOCK button on your key fob.
• Continue to hold the LOCK button, wait at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the PANIC button. Release both buttons at the same time.
• To reactivate the feature, repeat this procedure.
• If the programming procedure was unsuccessful see your authorized dealer for programming assistance.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

To Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped

Press the LIFTGATE button twice within five seconds to open/close the power liftgate. The liftgate will beep for 2 seconds and then open/close. If the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power closed, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position.

If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a powered liftgate, pressing the button will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you to manually access the liftgate area. The liftgate will re-lock automatically within 10 seconds once the liftgate is closed.

Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock

The Flash Lights With Lock or Unlock feature can be turned on or off.

• On electronic vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to "Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock?" under "Use Factory Settings?" in the EVIC section of this manual.

• On non EVIC - equipped vehicles perform the following steps:

• Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle.

• Press and hold the LOCK button on your key fob.
• Continue to hold the LOCK button, wait at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the UNLOCK button. Release both buttons at the same time.
• To reactivate the feature, repeat this procedure.
• If the programming procedure was unsuccessful see your authorized dealer for programming assistance.

Using The Panic Alarm:

To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press and release the PANIC button on the transmitter once. When the Panic mode is activated, the interior lights will illuminate, the headlamps and parking lights will flash, and the horn will sound.

To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC button on the transmitter a second time. Panic mode will automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if the vehicle is started and exceeds 15 mph. During the Panic Mode, the door locks and remote keyless entry systems will function normally. Panic mode will not disarm the security system on vehicles so equipped.

NOTE: When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system.

Programming Additional Transmitters

Refer to SENTRY KEY "Customer Key Programming."

NOTE: If you do not have a programmed transmitter, contact your authorized dealer for assistance.

Battery Replacement

The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 battery.

NOTE: Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.

1. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a small screwdriver or similar flat object to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket during removal.

Close-up of a textured, oval-shaped object with a black arrow pointing to its end (no visible text or symbols)

81182c72

Separating Transmitter Halves

1. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
2. To reassemble the transmitter case, snap the two halves together. Make sure there is an even “gap” between the two halves. Test transmitter operation.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

General Information

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
- This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

If your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions.

1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

DOOR LOCKS

Manual Door Locks

Lock the doors by pushing up on the lock knob on each door trim panel.

Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows and control buttons (no visible text or symbols)

Door Lock Plunger

If the lock knob is up when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door.

WARNING!

• For personal security and safety in the event of an accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

Power Door Locks

A power door lock switch is located on each front door trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock all doors and liftgate.

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and touchscreen (no visible text or symbols)

Power Door Lock Switch

If you press the power door lock switch while the key is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power

locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A chime will sound if the key is in the ignition and a door is open, as a reminder to remove the key.

Auto Door Locks — If Equipped

The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met:

1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled.

2. The transmission is in gear.

3. All doors are closed.

4. The throttle is pressed.

5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).

6. The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter.

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If desired, the "Auto Door Locks?" feature can be turned on or off by using the following procedure:

• On electronic vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to "Auto Door Locks?" under "Use Factory Settings?" in the EVIC section of this manual.
• On non EVIC - equipped vehicles perform the following steps:

Auto Door Locks Programming

1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure).

3. Place the key into the ignition.

4. Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the LOCK position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of four times; ending in the LOCK position (Do not start the engine).

5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver's door lock switch in the LOCK direction.
6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has been disabled.
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

Auto Unlock On Exit — If Equipped

This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when any door is opened. This will occur only after the vehicle has been driven (shifted out of Park with all doors closed) and then shifted back into the Park position.

This feature will not operate if there is any manual operation of the power door locks (Lock or Unlock). If desired, the "Auto Unlock On Exit?" feature can be turned on or off by using the following procedure:

• On electronic vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to "Auto Unlock On Exit?" under "Use Factory Settings?" in the EVIC section of this manual.
• On non EVIC - equipped vehicles perform the following steps:

Auto Unlock On Exit Programming

1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt (fastening the seat belt will cancel any chimes that may be confusing during this programming procedure).

3. Insert the key into the ignition.

4. Within 15 seconds, cycle the key from the LOCK position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of four times ending in the LOCK position (do not start the engine).

5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver's door lock switch in the UNLOCK direction.
6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has been changed.
7. Repeat the above steps to alternate the availability of this feature.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled before the feature could be changed. If necessary repeat this procedure.

NOTE: Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock features in accordance with local laws.

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Child Protection Door Lock

To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a child protection door lock system.

NOTE: When the child lock system is engaged, the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.

To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock

1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the vehicle's ignition key (or any similar item) into the child lock control and slide it upward.

Medical imaging scan showing internal anatomy with a black arrow indicating a specific region (no text or symbols present)

Child Lock Control

1. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to engage the Child Protection Door Lock on the opposite rear door.

NOTE: After engaging the child protection door lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position.

NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the door lock knob to the UNLOCK position, roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle.

WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged.

To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock

1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the vehicle's ignition key (or any similar item) into the child lock control and slide it downward.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to disengage the Child Protection Door Lock on the opposite rear door.

NOTE: After disengaging the child protection door lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position.

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WINDOWS

Power Windows

The window controls on the driver's door control all the door windows. The switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position or during accessory delay.

Interior view of a car's dashboard showing the left side with a keypad and control panel (no text or symbols visible)

Power Window Switches

The window lock switch on the driver's door allows you to disable the window controls on the passenger doors. When the lock switch is pressed the window controls on the passenger doors will not illuminate and the passenger windows will be disabled.

Auto Down Feature

All the power window switches have an auto down feature. Press the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.

To open the window part way, press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop.

The power window switches remain active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

The time is customer programmable through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to "Power Accessory Delay?" under "Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)" in Section 4 of this manual for details.

Auto Up Feature with Anti-Pinch Protection

Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.

To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.

To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop.

NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then stop. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window.

NOTE: Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually.

WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the window path before closing.

Reset

Any time the vehicle battery is disconnected, or goes dead, the auto-up function will be disabled. To reactivate the auto-up feature, perform the following steps after vehicle power is restored:

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Pull the window switch up to close window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with

the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.

LIFTGATE

The liftgate can be unlocked using the remote keyless entry or by activating the power door lock switches located on either interior front door trim panel.

Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed. To open the liftgate, pull the release handle while raising the liftgate with one fluid motion.

Front view of a car showing the rear grille and side panel, with a black arrow pointing to the front bumper area (no text or symbols present)

8107301d

Liftgate Release Handle

The liftgate will not manually open if the vehicle is locked, in gear or if the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).

NOTE:

- In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the lift-gate trim panel.

- If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a powered liftgate, pressing the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you to manually access the liftgate area. The liftgate will re-lock automatically within 10 seconds once the liftgate is closed.

Power Liftgate — If Equipped

The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. Press the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter twice within five seconds, to open the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate.

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The power liftgate may also be opened by pressing the button located on the overhead console.

Top-down view of a car air conditioner unit with control panel and door (no visible text or symbols)

Power Liftgate Button

When the remote button is pressed the "Lamp Flash" feature is enabled the tail lights will flash to signal that

the liftgate is opening or closing. A beeping signal will sound two seconds before the liftgate starts to open or close.

WARNING!

During power operation, personal injury or cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away.

NOTE:

- If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position, provided it meets sufficient resistance.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
• The liftgate must be in the full open position in order to power close. If the liftgate is not fully open, press the power button to fully open the liftgate and then you can press the power button to close.
• If the liftgate release switch is activated while the power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position.
• The power liftgate switches will not operate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below -12^ F ( -24^ C) or temperatures above 143^ F

(62°C). Be sure to remove any build-up of snow or ice from the liftgate before pressing any of the power liftgate switches.

- If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle, the system will automatically stop and must be opened or closed manually.

WARNING!

• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS

Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front airbags for both the driver and front passenger, and if equipped, left and right window bags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window and a driver inflatable knee blocker. If you will be carrying children too small for adult-size seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature (refer to the Child Restraint section in this manual), can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems.

If your vehicle is equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) there will be a Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light located on the center of the instrument panel.

Interior view of a car dashboard with air vent, control knobs, and a directional arrow pointing to the grille (no visible text or symbols)

Passenger Airbag Light — If OCS Equipped

NOTE: The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity.

Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.

WARNING!

In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap/Shoulder Belts.

The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.

WARNING!

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

WARNING!

• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body. These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.

Pulling Out Lap/Shoulder Belt

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click".

Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Connecting Latch Plate To Buckle

WARNING!

• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren't as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.

• Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Removing Slack From Belt

WARNING!

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won't be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.

• A twisted belt can't do its job as well. In a collision it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. If you can't straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to your dealer and have it fixed.

• Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seats, the shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck. Press the button to release the anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position that serves you best.

Illustration of a person wearing a hooded garment next to a vertical bar with a double-headed arrow (no text or symbols)

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you'll prefer a higher position. When you release the anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.

Example of a Twisted Seat Belt

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180^ to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.

Close-up of a car seatbelt being adjusted for a hand, with a black arrow indicating the angle (no text or symbols present)

1. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.

Close-up of a car seatbelt buckle being adjusted for a hand (no text or symbols visible)

Grasp and Twist Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing

1. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing.

Seat Belt Pretensioners

The seat belt assemblies for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners are designed to work for all size occupants.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag control module (see Airbag Section). Like the front airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)

If the driver's seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert will alert the driver or front passenger to buckle their seat belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver's seat belt is buckled.

BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver's or front passenger's seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps:

NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or RUN position. DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert).

1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, and buckle the driver's seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position (engine does not need to be running), and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the RUN position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver's seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt buckled.

NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract the seat belt.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming.

The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.

NOTE: Although BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver's seat belt remains unbuckled.

Seat Belts and Pregnant Women

We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe.

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision.

Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR)

The center seating position on vehicles equipped with a second row bench seat is equipped with an Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR). Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then pull on the belt until it is all removed from the retractor. Allow the belt to return into the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint. Follow the instructions of the child restraint manufacturer.

NOTE: To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor. You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor.

Seat Belts and Pregnant Women

We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe.

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision.

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and stow it.

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not needed.

Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag

This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver's front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger's front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.

Front Airbags and Knee Bolsters Locations

NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment in low speed collisions.

The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design. This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

Also, the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal regulations that define Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system.

This vehicle may also be equipped with a driver inflatable knee blocker located on the instrument panel below the steering column.

This vehicle may also be equipped with left and right side curtain airbags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with window bags, they are located above the side windows. Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and steering wheel, with two arrows pointing to the dashboard (no text or symbols present)

Side Curtain Airbags
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.

WARNING!

• Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to manually open them. You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you. These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right window bags, do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the side curtain airbag. The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions.
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right window bags, do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.

Front airbags, along with seat belts, and front seat belt pretensioners, work with the instrument panel knee blockers to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Left and right window bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.

The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions.

NOTE: If equipped with an Occupant Classification System (OCS), the passenger front airbag may not deploy even when the driver front airbag has determined the seat is empty or is occupied by a child.

If your vehicle is so equipped, the window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. But even in collisions where the airbags inflate, you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.

1. Children 12 years old and under should ride buckled up in the rear seat.
2. Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to information on Child Restraint in this section) should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats.

4. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.

5. If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child restraint (refer to information on Child Restraint in this section).

6. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
7. All occupants should use their seat belts properly.
8. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate.
9. If your vehicle has side curtain airbags do not lean against the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door.
10. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the "If You Need Customer Assistance" section in this manual.

WARNING!

• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions the airbags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front airbag deployment could cause serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• If the vehicle has left and right window bags, they also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.

"The Airbag System" consists of the following:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
- AIRBAG Light
- Driver Airbag
- Front Passenger Airbag
- Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) — If Equipped
- Front Impact Sensors
• Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
• Steering Wheel and Column
- Instrument Panel
- Seat Belt Reminder Light
- Driver Inflatable Knee Bolster — If Equipped

• Knee Impact Bolster
  • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Front Passenger Seat Occupant Classification System (OCS) — If OCS Equipped
• Occupant Classification Module
• Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light
• Interconnecting Wiring
• Bladder Assembly
• Belt Tension Sensor

How The Airbag System Works

- The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate. Based on the level of collision severity, the front control module determines the

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

proper rate of inflation. The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation.

• The ORC will not detect side, roll over, or rear impacts.
• The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or RUN positions. These include all of the items listed above except the steering wheel and column, instrument panel and passenger knee bolsters. If the key is in the OFF position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and will not inflate.

- Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning light and PAD indicator light in the center of the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds for a self-check when the ignition is

first turned on. After the self-check, the AIRBAG warning light will turn off. If equipped, the PAD indicator light will function normally. If the ORC

detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up.

WARNING!

Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instrument panel could mean you won't have the airbags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right away.

- The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel. When the ORC and impact sensors detects a collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of

nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size. The airbags fully inflate in about 50–70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The airbags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

The driver's and passenger's front airbag gas is vented through the airbag material towards the instrument panel. In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.

- The Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains are designed to activate only in certain side collisions. When the ORC and the side impact sensors (with side impact option) detects a collision requiring the window bags to

inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the window bag. The inflating window bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about one quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the window bag inflates. This especially applies to children. The window bag is only about 3 12 inches (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.

- When the ORC and the impact sensors detect a collision requiring the Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker — If Equipped, signals the inflator unit. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker. The Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker inflates rearward towards the driver's knees to help

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

protect the knees and position you for the best interaction with the front airbag. The Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker fully inflates in about 50 milliseconds, this is only about half of the time it takes you to blink your eyes. It then quickly deflates while helping to protect the driver's knees.

• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees, and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag.
• If your vehicle contains a Passenger Airbag Disable indicator light, it will be equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS). The OCS system will classify an occupant into a size category based on sensor readings from within the seat cushion. Occupants should try to remain in a normally seated position. If the occupant's weight is transferred to

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

another object in the vehicle (i.e. feet on the dashboard), the OCS may not be able to properly approximate occupant size. Furthermore, the occupant size may appear to increase or decrease due to objects hanging on the seat, other passengers pushing on the seat, or objects lodged underneath the seat.

If there is a rapid change in temperature or humidity, the OCS may not be able to properly approximate occupant size. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used.

If there is a fault present in the system, the AIRBAG warning light will illuminate indicating that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. In the presence of an occupant in the passenger seat, if both the PAD indicator light and AIRBAG warning light are illuminated the airbag will be disabled.

The ORC will not allow front airbag deployment in the event of a collision for occupants classified into the empty or child size categories. The PAD indicator light will illuminate indicating that the Passenger Airbag is OFF when the OCS has determined that the occupant size category is a child. Also, when the seat is empty or an object that weighs less than a predetermined threshold is placed on the seat, the light will remain OFF. (The PAD indicator light is an amber light located on the center of the instrument panel above the climate controls.)

Interior view of a car dashboard with air vent, control knobs, and a directional arrow pointing to the grille (no text or symbols visible)

Passenger Airbag Light — If OCS Equipped

For almost all sizes of properly seated adults, the airbag will be enabled in the event of a collision. For small teenagers and some small adults, depending on size, the airbag may or may not be enabled in the event of a collision. Both drivers and passengers should always use the PAD indicator light as an indication if the front

passenger is properly positioned or not. If the PAD indicator light comes on when an adult is in the passenger seat, have the passenger re-position themselves in the seat until the light goes out.

Remember, if the PAD indicator light is illuminated the passenger front airbag will not inflate. For properly installed child restraint systems and children properly seated on the front passenger seat, the airbag will be disabled. If at all possible, place children 12 years and younger in a back seat.

- The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) — If Equipped is located beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM classifies the occupant into one of three size categories based on the input from the Bladder Assembly and Belt Tension Sensor. The size categories include empty, child, and adult. The OCM sends the Occupant Classification to the ORC to identify if a

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

front passenger airbag is allowed. If a fault is present, the AIRBAG warning light is illuminated.

• The Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light — If Equipped indicates to the driver and passenger when the airbag is turned OFF in the presence of a properly seated occupant. When the PAD indicator light is illuminated, the airbag is OFF. Also, when the Occupant Classification System (OCS) detects either an empty seat of a weight less than the predetermined occupant threshold, the ORC will not illuminate the PAD indicator light even though the airbag is turned off. When the OCS detects an adult the PAD indicator light will be off, and the airbag will be enabled.
• The Belt Tension Sensor (BTS) — If Equipped is located at the outboard passenger lap belt anchor. The BTS generates a signal based on outboard lap belt tension. This signal is sent to the OCM to ensure that

the resultant bladder pressure increase due to applied lap belt tension does not cause a small occupant to be classified as a larger occupant.

- The Bladder Assembly — If Equipped is located beneath the seat cushion foam. The pressure sensor sends a signal to the OCM.

The front passenger seat assembly contains critical components that affect the front passenger airbag deployment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat components are critical for the Occupant Classification System (OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calculate the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover.

WARNING!

Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly, its related components, or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident. A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS).

The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:

• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way.
• Do not modify the front seat center console or center position seat in any way.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat cover.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
• At no time should any supplemental restraint system (SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If A Deployment Occurs

The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags when the ORC and impact sensors detect a moderate-to-severe collision, to help restrain the vehicle passengers, and then immediately deflate.

NOTE: A collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system. This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any or all of the following may occur:

• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.

However, if you haven't healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.

• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed airbags, front seat belt pretensioners and driver inflatable knee blocker cannot protect you in another collision. Have the airbags, front seat belt pretensioners and driver inflatable knee blocker (if equipped) replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Enhanced Accident Response

If the airbags and seat belt pretensioners deploy after an impact and the electrical system remains functional, vehicles equipped with power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition, approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle has stopped moving, the interior lights will illuminate until the ignition switch is turned off.

In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment, with the vehicle stopped, and the vehicle communication network intact, and the power intact, the Enhanced Accident Response System performs the following functions:

• Cuts off fuel to the engine
- Flashes hazard lights
- Turns on the interior lights approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle has stopped moving, and will remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed
- Unlocks the doors automatically

Maintaining Your Airbag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or frame.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service. If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.

WARNING!

• You need proper knee impact protection in a collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has airbags.

NOTE: Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Airbag Light

You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. While the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have

an authorized dealer service the system immediately.

• The AIRBAG light does not come on or flickers during the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on.
• The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second interval.
• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while driving.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to record up to 5 seconds of specific vehicle data parameters (see the following list) in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment, and up to a quarter second of high-speed deceleration data during and/or after airbag deployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.

NOTE:

1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).

In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corporation, such investigations may be requested by customers, insurance carriers, government officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those associated with universities, and with hospital and insurance organizations.

In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative), the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request. General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those maintained by the US government and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corporation to any third party except when:

1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database, provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a DaimlerChrysler Corporation product
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law

Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:

• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for electronically-controlled safety systems, including the airbag system
  • Airbag disable light status (if equipped)
• "Time" of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage)

• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
- Impact acceleration and angle
- Seatbelt status
- Brake status (service and parking brakes)
- Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
• Transmission gear selection
- Cruise control status
- Traction/stability control status
- Tire pressure monitoring system status – If Equipped

Child Restraint

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times — babies and children, too. Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a seat appropriate for their age and size. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats, rather than in the front.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child's size.

Infants And Small Children

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat owner's manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child.

- Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types

of child restraints can be used rearward-facing; infant carriers and "convertible" child seats. Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to "Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)" later in this section.

• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs (9 kg). "Convertible" child seats can be used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old.
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position.

Older Children and Child Restraints

Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older than one year. These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to "Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)" later in this section.

The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit the vehicle's seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle's cushion while the child's back is against the seatback, then the child should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat. The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped with a front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap portion.)

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.

• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
- The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible.
- Check belt fit periodically. A child's squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position.
- If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. If this doesn't help, move the child to the center rear seating position and use the lap belt. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back.

NOTE: For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-SEATCHECK.

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant.

Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint:

- Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. We also recommend that you make sure

that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it, before you buy it.

• The restraint must be appropriate for your child's weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may not work when you need it.

The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch plates, which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out.
• If the belt still can't be tightened, or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If you still can't make the child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer's directions.

- When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle. Don't leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.

Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)

Each vehicle is equipped with two child restraint anchorage systems called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH child restraint anchorage systems are installed on second-row seats only. LATCH child restraint anchorage systems are not provided on the six passenger third row seats.

72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Six passenger vehicles are equipped with second row fold & tumble seats with lower anchorages that can accommodate rigid mount or flexible webbing-mounted LATCH-compatible child seats. The third row seating positions are not equipped with lower anchorages. However, the third row driver side seating position is equipped with a tether anchor. If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints in any third row seating position, you must use the vehicle's seat belt.

Close-up of a mechanical component with two black arrows pointing to specific parts (no visible text or symbols)

LATCH ANCHORS

Five passenger vehicles are equipped with a second row bench seat only. The two outboard seating positions have lower anchorages that can accommodate rigid mount or flexible webbing-mounted LATCH-compatible child seats. The center seating position of the bench seat can

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73

also accommodate a flexible webbing-mounted LATCH-compatible child seat by using the inboard lower anchors of the two outboard seating positions. A rigid mount seat can only be installed at this seating location by using the vehicle's seat belt. Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment, NEVER install LATCH-compatible child seats such that two child seats share a common lower anchorage. If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle's seat belt for the outboard position, but you must use the vehicle's seat belt at the center position.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and seatbelt fastening mechanism (no text or symbols)

Bench Seat LATCH Anchors

The lower anchor bars of the LATCH System are located where the seat back meets the seat cushion. The tether anchors are located on the rear surface of the seat. Child restraint systems designed to be compatible with the vehicles LATCH System are now available. LATCH child restraints make installation into the vehicle simple and

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

convenient. When using the LATCH System, always follow the child restraint manufacturer's installation instructions.

NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH compatible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.

Tether Anchors

There are tether strap anchorages behind all second row seating positions and for six passenger vehicles on the driver's side third row seating position. The tether anchors are located in the rear surface of the seat. When using the tether anchorages in the second row fold & tumble seating positions and in the outboard second row bench seating positions, ensure that the strap is routed over the top of the seatback and under the head restraint between the head restraint posts.

Interior view of a car seat assembly with a black belt and arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

2ND ROW TETHER ANCHOR

When the tether anchorage is used in the center second row bench seating position or on the third row seating position, where equipped, the strap should be positioned straight over the top of the seatback.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75

Interior view of a car showing rear seats, rear seatbelt, and side-mounted sensors (no text or symbols visible)

Bench Seat Tether Anchors

When the tether anchorage is used in the third row seating position, the strap should be positioned straight over the top of the seatback.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to a small component (no text or symbols visible)

3RD ROW TETHER ANCHOR

Installing A Child Restraint

We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many, but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the

76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap.

In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.

Child restraint systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturer's will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older products.

Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.

NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. It is recommended that before installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.

Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with, and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle.

Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here. Again, carefully follow the instructions that come with the child restraint system.

WARNING!

Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

Transporting Pets

Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in. Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.

78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.

A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered as a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.

SAFETY TIPS

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO) follow the safety tips below.

Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area.

If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

WARNING!

If you are required to drive with the deck lid / liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after

a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the belt.

Airbag Light

The light should come on and remain on for 4 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the LED is not lit during starting, and/or the light stays on or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield.

NOTE: If the defroster is not working or you are unable to feel air against the windshield in defrost mode, please see your authorized dealer service center for repairs.

80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (including spare) for proper pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid, transmission fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

■ Mirrors....86

□ Inside Day / Night Mirror....8 6
□ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . . 8 6
□ Driver's Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer — If Equipped....87
□ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature ..... 8 7
□ Outside Mirror — Driver's Side ..... 8 7
□ Outside Mirror — Passenger's Side ..... 8 8
□ Power Remote-Control Mirrors ..... 8 8

□ Heated Remote Control Mirrors — If Equipped....8 9
□Illuminated Vanity Mirrors....89

■ Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™) — If Equipped 89

□ Operations....9 1
□ Phone Call Features .98
□ UConnect™ System Features .....100
□ Advanced Phone Connectivity .....105

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

□ Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™ System....106
□ General Information....1 1 4

■ Seats....1 1 5

□ 10-Way Driver's Power Seat — If Equipped .. 115
□ 8-Way Driver's Power Seat — If Equipped . . . 116
□ 4-Way Passenger's Power Seat....1 1 6
□ Adjustable Head Restraints ..... 1 1 7
□ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 8
☐ Second Row Manual Seat Recliner — If Equipped....1 2 0
□ Second Row Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped....1 2 1

☐ Second Row Bench Seating — If Equipped....1 2 2
☐ Second Row Fold & Tumble Seats — If Equipped....1 2 3
□ Third Row Easy Exit — If Equipped .....124
□ Third Row Seating — If Equipped .....126
□ Load Floor — If Equipped .....127
□ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer .....128

■ Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped .....129

□ Easy Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat Only) 132
☐ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 1 3 3

■ To Open And Close The Hood .....133

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83

■ Lights....134

□ Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights ..... 1 3 4

□ Interior Lights....135

□ Multi-Function Lever....136

□ Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel Lights....136

□ Automatic Headlights....137

□ Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) ..... 1 3 8

□ Lights-On Reminder ..... 1 3 8

□ Headlight Time Delay ..... 1 3 8

□ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 8

□ Turn Signals....139

□ Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch ..... 1 3 9

□ Passing Light....139

■ Windshield Wipers And Washers ..... 1 4 0

□Windshield Washers 140

□ Mist Feature....14

□Windshield Wiper Operation....141

□ Intermittent Wiper System ..... 1 4 1

□ Rear Window Wiper/Washer....141

■ Tilt Steering Column .....143

Electronic Speed Control....144

□ To Activate 144

□ To Set a Desired Speed .....145

□ To Deactivate....145

□ To Resume Speed....145

84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

□ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 4 5
□ To Accelerate For Passing....146

■ Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 1 4 6

□ Programming HomeLink®....147

□ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming ..150

□ Using HomeLink® 151

□ Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Buttons....1 5 1

□ Security 151

□ Troubleshooting Tips....152

□ General Information....152

■ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .....153

Electronic Brake Control System - ABS/TCS/BAS/ESP 154

□ Traction Control System (TCS) ..... 1 5 4
□ Brake Assist System (BAS)....154
□ ESP (Electronic Stability Program) ..... 1 5 5

■ Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 1 5 9

■ Rear Park Sense System — If Equipped . . . . . . 1 6 0

□ Rear Park Assist Sensors....161
□ Rear Park Assist Warning Display ..... 1 6 2
□ Enable/Disable The Rear Park Assist System — If Equipped....165
□ Service The Rear Park Assist System .....165
□ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System .....166

■ Rear Camera — If Equipped ..... 1 6 6

■ Overhead Console — If Equipped ..... 1 6 8

□ Courtesy/Reading Lights....168
□ Sunglasses Storage....168

■ Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 6 9

□ Express Open Feature ..... 1 7 0

□ Wind Buffeting....171

□ Sunroof Comfort Position — If Equipped . . . . 1 7 1

□ Sunroof Maintenance....172

■ Electrical Power Outlets ..... 172

□ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . . . . . . 1 7 3

■ Cupholders....174

□ Front Seat Cupholders ..... 1 7 4

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85

□ Second Row Seat Cupholders ..... 1 7 4
☐ Third Row Seat Cupholders — If Equipped . . .175

■ Storage....175

□ Console Features....17
□ Rear Cargo Storage Bin — If Equipped ..... 1 7 5
□ Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped....176
□ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks .... 177

■ Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped .....178

■ Load Leveling System ..... 1 8 0

86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

MIRRORS

Inside Day / Night Mirror

Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror.

MANUAL REARVIEW MIRROR

Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward windshield).

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

When using this feature the mirror will automatically adjust for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light will illuminate to indicate when this feature is on.

Front view of a car rearview mirror with control buttons and an arrow pointing to the front panel (no text or symbols on the main body)

Automatic Dimming Mirror

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87

Driver's Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer — If Equipped

This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn this feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the Rearview Mirror.

Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature

All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have three detent positions; full forward, full rearward, and normal.

Outside Mirror — Driver's Side

Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.

88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Outside Mirror — Passenger's Side

Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the portion of the mirror closest to the vehicle. This type of mirror will give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your vehicle.

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object.

Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror.

Power Remote-Control Mirrors

Use the mirror select switch, located on the driver's door trim panel above the power window switches, to adjust the view obtained in the outside mirrors.

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and door (no visible text or symbols)

Power Mirror Switches

Press the rocker switch to the L or R for Left or Right mirror selection. Use the center off position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position.

Select a mirror and press one of the four arrows for the direction you want the mirror to move.

Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in section 3 of this manual.

Heated Remote Control Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window Defrost.

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors

An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.

Sun Visor Extension

The sun visors may be pulled out to provide extended coverage of the side glass.

HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) — IF EQUIPPED

UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands (e.g., "Call" ... "Mike" ... "Work" or "Dial" ... "248-555-1212"). Your cellular phone's audio is transmitted through your vehicle's audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect™ system.

NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth "Hands-Free Profile," version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones.

90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle, and enables you to mute the system's microphone for private conversation.

The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name. Each language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that language. This system is driven through your Bluetooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™ features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle's UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is available in English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).

Back view of a car dashboard with labeled buttons (AUTO, OFF) and navigation icons (no text or symbols on the main body)

8105b20d

UConnect™ Switches

The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the system and the radio has the two control buttons that will

enable you to access the system. Actual button location may vary with radio. The individual buttons are described in the "Operations" section.

The UConnect™ system can be used with any Hands-Free Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any UConnect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details.

The UConnect ^TM system is fully integrated with the vehicle's audio system. The volume of the UConnect ^TM system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so equipped.

The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect ^TM system such as "CELL" or caller ID on certain radios.

Operations

Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect ^TM system and to navigate through the UConnect ^TM menu structure. Voice commands are required after most UConnect ^TM system prompts. You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options.

• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the voice on beep, which follows the "Ready" prompt or another prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be used. For example, instead of saying "Setup" and then "Phone Pairing," the following compound command can be said: "Setup Phone Pairing."
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the combined form of the voice command is given. You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command, when you are asked for it. For

92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

example, you can use the combined form voice command "Phonebook New Entry," or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands: "Phonebook" and "New Entry." Please remember, the UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away from you.

Voice Command Tree

Refer to "Voice Tree" at the end of this section.

Help Command

If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to know your options are at any prompt, say "Help" following the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help.

To activate the UConnect ^TM system from idle, simply press the 'Phone' button and follow audible prompts for directions. All UConnect ^TM system sessions begin with a press of the 'Phone' button on the radio control head.

Cancel Command

At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say "Cancel" and you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu.

Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.

To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone owner's manual. One of the following vehicle specific websites may also provide detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone that you have:

NOTE:

• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
- www.jeep.com/uconnect

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93

The following are general phone to UConnect™ System pairing instructions:

• Press the 'Phone' button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Setup Phone Pairing" and follow the audible prompts.
• When prompted, after the voice on beep, say "Pair a Phone" and follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number, which you will later need to enter into your cellular. You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not need to remember this pin number after the initial pairing process.

• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name.

• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
  only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™ system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call. You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to "Advanced Phone Connectivity").

Call/Dial by Saying a Number

• Press the 'Phone' button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Dial."

94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• System will prompt you to say the number you want call.
• For example, you can say "234-567-8901." The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination. Based on the country in which the vehicle was purchased, the UConnect™ limits the user from dialing invalid combination of numbers. For example, in USA, 234-567-890 is nine digits long, which is not a valid USA phone number - the closest valid phone number has ten digits.
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the display of certain radios.

Call by Saying a Name

• Press the "Phone" button to begin.

• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Dial" or Call."

• System will prompt you to say the name of the person you want call.

• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say the name of the person you want to call. For example, you can say "John Doe," where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phonebook. Refer to "Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook," to learn how to store a name in the phonebook.
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number, which may appear in the display of certain radios.

Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook

NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended when vehicle is not in motion.

- Press the "Phone" button to begin.

• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Phonebook New Entry."
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of long names helps the voice recognition and is recommended. For example, say "Robert Smith" or "Robert" instead of "Bob."
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., "Home," "Work," "Mobile," or "Pager"). This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry, if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding.

After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-book, you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu.

The UConnect ^™ system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations. Each language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that language.

Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook

NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion.

• Press the 'Phone' button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Phonebook Edit."
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work, mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.

- When prompted, recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing.

After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return to the main menu.

"Phonebook Edit" can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe's work number later using the "Phonebook Edit" feature.

Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook

NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion.

- Press the 'Phone' button to begin.

- After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Phonebook Delete."

- After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say "List Names" to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose. To select one of the entries from the list, press the "Voice Recognition" button while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired entry and say "Delete."

- After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will ask you which designation you wish to delete, home, work, mobile, or pager. Say the designation you wish to delete.

NOTE: Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted.

After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted. Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted.

Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook

• Press the 'Phone' button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Phonebook Erase All."
• The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted.
• Note that only the phone book in the current language is deleted.

List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook

• Press the 'Phone' button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Phonebook List Names."
• The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the phonebook entries.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the "Voice Recognition" button during the playing of the desired name, and then say "Call.

NOTE: The user can also exercise "Edit" or "Delete" operations at this point.

• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.

Phone Call Features

The following features can be accessed through the UConnect ^TM system if the feature(s) are available on your cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be accessed through the UConnect ^TM system. Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have.

Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call Currently in Progress

When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call. To reject the call, press and hold the 'Phone' button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected.

Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call Currently in Progress

If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone. Press the 'Phone' button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call.

NOTE: The UConnect™ system compatible phones in market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only either answer an incoming call or ignore it.

Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress

To make a second call while you are currently in a call, press the 'Voice Recognition' button and say "Dial" or "Call" followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the

second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to "Toggling Between Calls." To combine two calls, refer to "Conference Call."

Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold

To put a call on hold, press the 'Phone' button until you hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the 'Phone' button until you hear a single beep.

Toggling Between Calls

If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the 'Phone' button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one time.

Conference Call

When two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press and hold the 'Phone' button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call.

Three-Way Calling

To initiate three-way calling, press the 'Voice Recognition' button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under "Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress." After the second call has established, press and hold the 'Phone' button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call.

Call Termination

To end a call in progress, momentarily press the 'Phone' button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.

100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Redial

• Press the 'Phone' button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Redial."
• The UConnect™ system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone.

NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ system.

Call Continuation

Call continuation is progression of a phone call on UConnect ^™ system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to off. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:

- After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or

until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect ^TM system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone.

• After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.

UConnect™ System Features

Language Selection

To change the language that the UConnect ^TM system is using,

- Press the 'Phone' button to begin.

• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say the name of the language you wish to switch to (English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection.

After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and voice commands will be in that language.

NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change operation, only the language specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages.

Emergency Assistance

If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable:

- Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area.

If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect ^TM system is operational, you may reach the emergency number as follows:

• Press the 'Phone' button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Emergency" and the UConnect™ system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is only supported in the USA.

NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area.

The UConnect ^™ system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly.

Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in

102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect ^TM system.

Towing Assistance

If you need towing assistance,

• Press the 'Phone' button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Towing Assistance."

NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454 for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico city in Mexico).

Please refer to the 24-Hour "Towing Assistance" coverage details in the Warranty information booklet and on the 24-Hour Towing Assistance Card.

Paging

To learn how to page, refer to "Working with Automated Systems." Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time-out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect™ system.

Voice Mail Calling

To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to "Working with Automated Systems."

Working with Automated Systems

This method is designed to be used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system.

You can use your UConnect ^TM system to access a voice-mail system or an automated service, such as, paging service or automated customer service. Some services require immediate response selection, in some instances, that may be too quick for use of UConnect ^TM system.

When calling a number with your UConnect™ system that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push the 'Voice Recognition' button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word "Send." For example, if required to enter your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 # , you can press the ' Voice R button and say "3 7 4 6 # Send." Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by "Send" is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.

Barge In - Overriding Prompts

The 'Voice Recognition' button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately. For example, if a prompt is playing "Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...," you could press the 'Voice Recognition' button and say "Pair a Phone" to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.

Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off

Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect™ system will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).

• Press the 'Phone' button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Setup Confirmations." The UConnect™ system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it.

Phone and Network Status Indicators

If available on the radio and/or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by your cell phone, the UConnect ^TM system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect ^TM . The status is given for roaming network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.

Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad

You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle's audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.

NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the audio.

Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)

When you mute the UConnect ^™ system, you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In order to mute the UConnect ^™ system:

• Press the 'Voice Recognition' button.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Mute."

In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:

- Press the 'Voice Recognition' button.

- After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Mute-off."

Information Service

When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone number "#121," you can access voice activated automated system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc. related information. This is an AT&T provided service.

Advanced Phone Connectivity

Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone

The UConnect ^TM system allows on going calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect ^TM system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect ^TM paired cellular phone to the UConnect ^TM system or vice-versa, press the 'Voice Recognition' button and say "Transfer Call."

Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone

Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices, but can only be actively "connected" with one electronic device at a time.

If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth ^TM connection between a UConnect ^TM paired cellular phone and the UConnect ^TM system, then follow the instruction described in your cellular phone user's manual.

List Paired Cellular Phone Names

• Press the 'Phone' button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Setup Phone pairing".
• When prompted, say "List Phones."

- The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority. To "select" or "delete" a paired phone being announced, press the 'Voice recognition' button and say "Select" or "Delete." Also, see the next two sections for an alternate way to "select" or "delete" a paired phone.

Select another Cellular Phone

This feature allows you to select and start using another phone with the UConnect ^TM system. The phone must have been previously paired to the UConnect ^TM system that you want to use it with.

• Press the 'Phone' button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Setup Select Phone" and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the 'Voice Recognition' button anytime while the list is being played, and then choose the phone that you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone call. If the selected phone is not available, the UConnect™ system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near (approximately with in 30 feet) the vehicle.

Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones

• Press the 'Phone' button to begin.

• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Setup Phone Pairing."

• At the next prompt, say "Delete" and follow the prompts.

• You can also press the 'Voice Recognition' button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete.

Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™ System

Voice Training

For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect™ system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this training mode, follow one of the two procedures:

From outside the UConnect ^TM mode (e.g. from radio mode)

- Press and hold the 'Voice Recognition' button for 5 seconds until the session begins, or,

- Press the 'Voice Recognition' button and say "Setup, Voice Training" command.

Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect™ system. For best results, the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan switched off.

This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.

To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts.

Voice Recognition (VR)

• Always wait for the beep before speaking.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107

• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet away from you.

• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period.
  • Performance is maximized under:

• low-to-medium blower setting,

• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.

- Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.

108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• When navigating through an automated system, such as voice mail, or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string, make sure to say "send."
• Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in motion is recommended.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
• UConnect™ phonebook nametag recognition rate is optimized for the voice of the person who stored the name in the phonebook.
• You can say "O" (letter "O") for "0" (zero). "800" must be spoken "eight-zero-zero."
• Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported.

Far End Audio Performance

• Audio quality is maximized under:
- low-to-medium blower setting.
- low-to-medium vehicle speed.
- low road noise.
- smooth road surface.
- fully closed windows.
- dry weather condition.
• operation from driver seat.

• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the UConnect™ system.
• Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109

Bluetooth Communication Link

Occasionally, Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect™ system. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth "on" mode.

Power-Up

After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position, or after a reset, you must wait at least five (5) seconds prior to using the system.

110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

graph TD
    A["Main Menu"] --> B["Call"]
    A --> C["Dial"]
    A --> D["Redial"]
    A --> E["Towing Assistance"]
    A --> F["Emergency"]
    A --> G["English/ Espanol/ Francais"]
    A --> H["Phonebook"]
    A --> I["Setup"]
    B --> J["Enter Name"]
    C --> K["Enter Number"]
    D --> L["Last Number on Phone is redialed"]
    G --> M["The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used. The phones paired are available across all languages."]
    H --> N["See Phonebook Flowchart"]
    I --> O["See Setup Flowchart"]
    J --> P["Number associated with entry is dialed"]
    K --> Q["Number is Dialed"]

Note: Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined.

819402e8

graph TD
    A["Phonebook"] --> B["New Entry"]
    A --> C["Edit"]
    A --> D["List Names"]
    A --> E["Delete"]
    A --> F["Erase All"]
    B --> G["Enter Name"]
    G --> H["Enter Location"]
    H --> I["Enter Number"]
    I --> J["New Entry Added"]
    C --> K["Enter Name"]
    K --> L["Enter Location"]
    L --> M["Current Number is played"]
    M --> N["Enter New Number"]
    N --> O["Entry is modified"]
    D --> P["Entries Listed one at a time."]
    E --> Q["Enter Name"]
    Q --> R["Enter Location"]
    R --> S["Entry Deleted"]
    F --> T["1st Confirmation"]
    T --> U["2nd Confirmation"]
    U --> V["Phonebook Cleared"]

Note: Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined.

8131b294

112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

graph TD
    A["Setup"] --> B["Confirmation Prompts"]
    A --> C["Pairing"]
    A --> D["Select Phone"]
    A --> E["Language"]
    B --> F["Toggle Confirmation Prompts on/off"]
    C --> G["Pair"]
    G --> H["Say 4 digit pin code."]
    H --> I["Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing."]
    C --> J["List Phones"]
    J --> K["System Lists Phones"]
    K --> L["Select phone to be deleted"]
    L --> M["Phone Deleted"]
    L --> N["System confirms"]
    N --> O["All Phones Deleted"]
    D --> P["New phone will temporarily override phone priorities."]
    E --> Q["Select a language: English, Espanol or Francais"]

Note: Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined.

819402e4

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113

North American English
Primary Alternate(s)
Zero Oh
One
Two
Three
Four
Five
Six
Seven
Eight
Nine
Star (*)
Plus (+)
Pound (#)
Add Location Add New
All All of them

North American English
Call
Cancel
Confirmation Prompts
Continue
Delete
Dial
Edit
Emergency
English
Erase All
Espanol
Francais
Help
Home
Language
List names

114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

North American English
List phones
Mobile
Mute
Mute off
New entry
No
Pager
Pair a phone
Phone pairing Pairing
Phonebook Phone book
Previous
Record again
Redial
Return to main menu Return. Main menu
Select phone Select
Send

North American English
Set up Phone settings / Phoneset up
Towing assistance
Transfer call
Try again
Work
Yes

General Information

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
- This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115

SEATS

10-Way Driver's Power Seat — If Equipped

The driver's power seat switches are located on the driver's front door trim panel. The bottom switch controls up/down, forward/rearward, and tilt adjustment. The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment and the middle switch controls the lumbar adjustment.

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

10-Way Driver's Power Seat

116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked. Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.

8-Way Driver's Power Seat — If Equipped

The driver's power seat switches are located on the driver's front door trim panel. The bottom switch controls up/down, forward/rearward, and tilt adjustment. The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.

4-Way Passenger's Power Seat

The front passenger power seat switches are located on the passenger front door trim panel. The bottom switch controls forward and rearward adjustment. The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117

Adjustable Head Restraints

Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down on the head restraint so that the upper edge is as high as practical. To raise the head restraint, pull up on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, depress the release tab located at the base of the head restraint and push down on the head restraint.

Close-up of a car seatbelt and rear seats with a black arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols visible)

Adjustable Head Restraints

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Heated Seats — If Equipped

This feature heats the driver, front passenger and second row seats. The controls for the front heated seats are located on the door trim panel next to the power seat switches.

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and buttons, no visible text or symbols

Front Heated Seat Switch

Press the switch once to select a heat setting (high or low) and press the switch a second time in the same direction to turn the heated seat off. The indicator light will show when LOW or HIGH heat is ON.

The controls for the second row heated seats are located on the center console between the seats. Press the switch once to select a heat setting (high or low) and press the switch a second time in the same direction to turn the heated seat off. The indicator light will show when LOW or HIGH heat is ON.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a central control panel and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Rear Heated Seat Switches

NOTE:

• If the lights in the second row heated seat switch begin to flash when the switch is pressed, it indicates that the heated seat is not functioning properly and that service is required. See your authorized dealer for service.
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within 2 to 3 minutes.
• The heated seats will turn off when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.

120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Second Row Manual Seat Recliner — If Equipped

The recliner mechanism control is on the outboard side of the seat. To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with numbered components and an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Seatback Release Lever
NOTE: When using the recliner mechanism with the 3rd row seat folded down, the second row seat may need to be adjusted forward to achieve full recline.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.

Second Row Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped

The adjusting bar is located under the front of the seat. Pull the bar up and move the seat to the desired position. Release the bar to lock the seat into position.

Top-down view of a car seatbelt with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Second Row Manual Seat Adjuster

Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.

122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked. Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.

Second Row Bench Seating — If Equipped

The second row seats may be used with either or both seatbacks folded forward for additional storage space.

To fold the seat, remove any objects from in front of or on the seat. Then pull handle located on the seatback and push the seatback forward.

Interior view of a car showing rear seats, side monitors, and a directional arrow pointing to the front seat (no text or symbols present)

Seatback Release Handle

To raise the second row seat, lift up on the seatback and push rearward until the seatback is latched. Move the seatback forward to be sure the seatback is fully latched.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

CAUTION!

Be sure there is nothing in front of the second row seat cushion before folding it down. Damage to the seat may occur.

Second Row Fold & Tumble Seats — If Equipped

The second row seats can be folded and tumbled forward for easy access to the third seat or rear cargo area.

To fold and tumble the seat, follow these steps:

1. Remove any obstructions from the floor in front of the seat.
2. Lower the head restraint to its full downward position and rotate the arm rest to the upright position.

3. Move the seat to the full rear position.

4. Pull up on the seatback release lever located on the outboard side of the seat labeled "1" and fold the seatback down.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with numbered components and an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

Seatback Release Lever

To assure the seatback is latched in the folded position, additional downward pressure on the seatback may be required when folding.

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1. Pull up on the release handle labeled "2" and lift firmly to tumble the seat fully forward. If the seat contacts the rear of the front seat, move the front seat forward.

Interior view of a car showing the seat and dashboard area with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

Seat Release Handle

To relatch the seat, tilt the seat rearward and push down firmly to engage the rear attachments. Then lift the seatback release lever labeled "1" and pull the seatback up to return it to its full upright position.

WARNING!

In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully latched.

Third Row Easy Exit — If Equipped

For passengers sitting in the third row seats, the second row seats can be folded and tumbled forward for easy exit.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

To fold and tumble the seat forward, follow these steps:

1. Pull up on the seatback release handle "1" located on the back of the seat to fold the seatback down.

Close-up of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Release Handle 1 Location

1. Pull the release strap "2" located at the bottom of the seat to lift and tumble the seat forward.

Close-up of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols visible)

Release Strap 2 Location

To relatch the seat, tilt the seat rearward and push down firmly to engage the rear attachments. Then lift the seatback release lever labeled "1" and pull the seatback up to return it to its full upright position.

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Third Row Seating — If Equipped

The third row seats may be used with either or both seatbacks folded forward for additional storage space.

To fold the seat, remove any objects from in front of or on the seat. Then pull handle located on the seatback and push it forward.

Close-up of a car seat with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

Seat Release Handle

WARNING!

Do not sit in the 3rd row seat with the second row seatbacks folded or with the second row seats folded and tumbled. In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.

To raise the 3rd row seat, lift up on the seatback and push rearward until the seatback is latched. Move the seatback forward to be sure the seatback is fully latched.

CAUTION!

Be sure there is nothing in front of the 3rd row seat cushion before folding it down. Damage to the seat may occur.

WARNING!

• Not all head restraints in this vehicle are the same. Head restraints from one seating position should not be removed and installed in any other seating position. In a collision, serious injury or death may result if the proper head restraint is not installed on each seat.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle should not be used as a play area by children. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

Load Floor — If Equipped

For additional cargo space, the second and third row seatbacks may be folded forward and the load floor extended to cover the center console.

To extend the load floor, follow these steps:

1. Move the second row seats to the full rear position.
2. Fold the second and third row seatbacks down.

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1. Pull on the load floor strap and lift the panel from the driver's second row seatback over the center console and onto the passenger second row seat.

Top-down view of a car's front bumper with visible seat, dashboard, and rear seats (no text or symbols)

Load Floor Panel

NOTE: Be sure to reattach the strap to secure the load floor panel when not in use.

Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer

Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are built into the seatbacks of all front seats. The floor supports the partial weight of the bagged goods.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with two black arrows pointing to the backrest area (no text or symbols visible)

Grocery Bag Holders

DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED

If your vehicle is equipped with memory systems, your remote keyless entry transmitter or memory seat buttons on the driver's door panel can be used to recall the driver's seat, outside mirrors, adjustable pedals (if equipped) and radio station presets to saved positions.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and side panel with a black arrow pointing to a control panel (no text or symbols visible)

Driver Memory Switches

The memory seat buttons located on the driver's door will always recall stored settings. The remote keyless entry transmitter can be programmed to recall positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed. Refer to the following procedure on how to link a remote keyless entry transmitter to a position.

NOTE: The vehicle must be in Park to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in Park, a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).

To recall memory positions press memory button number 1 if you are recalling the memory position for driver one or press memory button number 2 if you are recalling the memory position for driver two. A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory buttons during a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the seat stops moving and a delay of approximately one second will occur before any other recalls can be selected.

Your vehicle has been delivered with two remote keyless entry transmitters. One or both transmitters can be linked to either memory position. Up to eight remote keyless entry transmitters can be used with your vehicle. The memory seat system can also accommodate up to eight transmitters linked to either of the two stored seat positions or any combination of the two positions.

To Program Memory Seat Buttons & RKE Transmitters, Follow These Steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Select Remote Linked to Memory from the EVIC and enter "Yes".
3. Use the seat, mirror and adjustable pedal switches to adjust the seat, recliner, side view mirrors and adjustable pedals to the desired positions.

4. Set the radio station presets.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key.

6. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the driver's door. A light in the button will flash telling you that you are in the set memory mode. You have five seconds to complete the next step.
7. Within 5 seconds, press and release button 1 or 2 on the driver's door. A chime will sound signaling you that the driver memory has been set. A message will also be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), indicating a position has been set.
8. Within 5 seconds, press and release the LOCK button on one of the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitters. A chime will sound signaling you that the transmitter has been successfully linked. A message will also be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), indicating the transmitter has been linked.

Repeat the above steps for the second position using the other driver's door numbered button and Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter.

Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered button are pressed, you erase the old memory and store a new one.

To Disable A Transmitter Link, Follow These Steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Select "Remote Linked To Memory" from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), Customer Programmable features and enter "YES.".
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key.

4. Press and release the SET(S) button located on the driver's door. A light in the button will flash telling you that you are in the set memory mode. You have five seconds to complete the next step.

5. Within 5 seconds, press and release button 1 or 2 on the driver's door. A chime will sound signaling you that the driver memory has been set. A message will also be displayed in the EVIC, indicating a position has been set.

6. Within 5 seconds, press and release the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitters. A chime will sound signaling you that the transmitter link has been successfully disabled. A message will also be displayed in the EVIC, indicating the transmitter has been disabled.

To disable another transmitter from memory positions 1 or 2, repeat the above steps for each transmitter.

NOTE: This function can be selected using the "Customer Programmable Features" in the EVIC section, otherwise see your authorized dealer for assistance.

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Easy Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat Only)

This feature provides automatic driver's seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the vehicle.

There are two possible Easy Exit and Easy Entry adjustments available:

• The seat cushion will move rearward approximately 2.5 inches (60 mm) if the starting position of the seat is greater than or equal to 4.72 inches (120 mm) forward of the rear seat stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch. The seat will then move forward approximately 2.5 inches (60 mm) when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position.
• The seat shall move to the position located 1 1/8 inches (30 mm) forward of the rear stop if the starting position is between 2.5 inches to 4.72 inches (60 mm to 120 mm) forward of the rear stop when the key is

removed from the ignition switch. The seat will move forward to the memory/driving position when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position.

The Easy Entry and Easy Exit feature will be automatically disabled if the seat is already positioned closer than 2.5 inches (60 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.

Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position.

NOTE: The Easy Exit Seat feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Exit Seat feature can be enabled or disabled through the customer programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to "Easy Exit Seat?" under "Use Factory Settings".

Tilt Mirrors in Reverse (Available with Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped

This additional feature provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the driver's view of the ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into the Reverse position. The outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of Reverse position. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position.

NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled through the customer programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to "Tilt Mirrors in Reverse?" under "Use Factory Settings".

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a valve mechanism with a black arrow indicating a specific component (no text or symbols present)

Hood Release Lever

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Next, push to the left the safety catch located under the front edge of the hood, near the center.

Front view of a car with grille and headlights (no visible text or symbols)

Hood Safety Catch

Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open position.

To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 15

cm (6 inches) and then drop it. This should secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

WARNING!

If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision. You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving.

LIGHTS

Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights

These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console. Each light is turned ON by pressing the lens. Press the lens a second time to turn the light

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

OFF. The lights also turn on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second detent.

Front view of a car air conditioner unit with control panel (no visible text or symbols)

Map/Reading Lights

NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle.

Interior Lights

The interior lights come on when a door is opened.

The interior lights will automatically turn off in about 15 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left in the Dome light position. Turn the ignition switch ON to restore the interior light operation.

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Multi-Function Lever

The Multi-Function Lever controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight beam selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights, the passing lights, and fog lights. The lever is located on the left side of the steering column.

Multi-Function Control Lever

Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel Lights

Turn the end of the Multi-Function Lever to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation. Turn to the second detent for headlight, park light and instrument panel light operation.

To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights, rotate the center portion of the Multi-Function Lever up or down.

Dimmer Control

With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the dimmer control for the interior lights on the Multi-Function Lever upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

Dome Light Position

8093e5f6

Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position.

Interior light Defeat (OFF)

8093e60e

Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom "OFF" position. The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open.

Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)

8093e650

Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent. This feature brightens the odometer and radio display when the parking lights or headlights are on during daylight conditions.

Automatic Headlights

This system automatically turns your headlights ON or OFF based on ambient light levels. To turn the system ON, turn the end of the Multi-Function Lever to the third detent position. When the system is ON, the Headlight Time Delay feature is also ON. This means your headlights will stay ON for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System OFF, turn the end of the Multi-Function Lever to the OFF position.

NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come ON in the Automatic mode.

Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)

The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is on, the headlights are off, and the parking brake is off. The headlight switch must be used for normal night time driving.

Lights-on Reminder

If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver's door is opened.

Headlight Time Delay

This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds, when leaving your vehicle in an unlighted area.

To activate the delay feature, turn off the ignition switch while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay interval begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the headlights or park lights are turned back on or the ignition switch is turned on, the delay will be cancelled.

If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner.

NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition off to activate this feature

Fog Lights — If Equipped

D The front fog light switch is on the Multi-Function Lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out the end of the Multi-Function Lever.

NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.

Turn Signals

Move the lever up or down to signal a right-hand or left-hand turn.

The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes to indicate the direction of the turn, and proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the switch or indicator lamp is defective.

If a defective bulb or wiring circuit is detected for the turn signal system, the arrow indicators will flash at a faster rate.

You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down.

NOTE: If a turn signal has been left on for at least a mile duration, a continuous chime will sound.

Turn Signal Lane Change Auto-Mode

Momentarily engage the multifunction control lever partially up or down to activate the lane change feature without holding the lever. The signal will flash 3 times, and automatically turn off.

Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch

Pull the Multi-Function Lever towards you to switch the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the Lever a second time to switch the headlights to LOW beam.

Passing Light

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the Multi-Function Lever toward you.

This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released.

140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The wipers and washers are operated by a switch on the control lever. The lever is located on the right side of the steering column. Rotate the end of the control lever to select the desired wiper speed.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Control

Windshield Washers

To use the front washer, pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the delay range, the wiper will operate for two wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.

If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn OFF.

Mist Feature

Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the wipers will continue to operate.

Windshield Wiper Operation

Rotate the end of the lever to the second detent for Low speed wiper operation, or to the third detent for High speed operation

Intermittent Wiper System

Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent position, then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles, to a cycle every second.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The switch on the right side of the steering column also controls operation of the rear wiper/washer function.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Control

Rotating the center of the switch up to the DEL (Delay) position or the ON position will activate the rear wiper. Push the lever forward to initiate the rear wash function in any of the three positions. The washer pump will

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

continue to operate as long as the lever is pressed. Upon release, the rear wiper will cycle two times before returning to the set position.

Adding Washer Fluid

The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared. It is located in the front of the engine compartment on the driver's side and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.

Interior view of a vehicle's dashboard and engine compartment showing wiring, sensors, and control panel (no readable text or symbols)

Washer Fluid Reservoir

The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when Low Washer Fluid illuminates in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).

TILT STEERING COLUMN

To tilt the column, pull the lever, located behind the turn signal control, toward you and move the steering wheel up or down, as desired. Release the lever to lock the steering wheel firmly in place.

Close-up of a car's dashboard and steering wheel, showing a black arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)

Tilt Steering Column Control

WARNING!

Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering column, you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident. Adjust the column only while the vehicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.

144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL

When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 30 mph (50 km/h). The speed control switches are located on the steering wheel.

Top-down view of a car steering wheel with visible brand labels (no readable text or symbols beyond branding)

SPEED CONTROL BUTTONS

To Activate:

Push the "ON/OFF" button once and the CRUISE indicator located near the instrument cluster odometer will illuminate showing the electronic speed control system is on. To turn the system OFF, push the "ON/OFF" button again and the system and indicator will turn off.

WARNING!

Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you aren't using it.

To Set a Desired Speed:

When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press and release the "SET" button. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. The CRUISE SET indicator located near the instrument cluster odometer will illuminate showing the electronic speed control is set.

NOTE: While in the AutoStick mode, Speed Control will only function in third or fourth gear (4 speed AutoStick) and fifth or sixth gear (6 speed AutoStick).

To Deactivate:

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the "CANCEL" button or normal braking while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the speed control without erasing the memory. Pushing the "ON/OFF" button to the OFF position or turning off the ignition erases the speed memory.

To Resume Speed:

To resume a previously set speed, push and release the "ACCEL/RESUME" button. Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

To Vary the Speed Setting:

When the speed control is set, speed can be increased by pressing and holding the "ACCEL/RESUME" button. When the button is released, a new set speed will be established.

Tapping the "ACCEL/RESUME" button once will result in a 2 mph (3 km/h) speed increase. Each time the button is tapped, speed increases so that tapping the button three times will increase speed by 6 mph (10 km/h), etc.

To decrease speed while speed control is set, press and hold the "COAST" button. Release the button when the desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.

146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Tapping the "COAST" button once will result in a 1 mph (2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is tapped, speed decreases.

To Accelerate For Passing:

Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.

Four speed automatic transmissions will experience a downshift to 3rd gear (5th gear on 6 speed AutoStick) while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This downshift to 3rd (5th gear on 6 speed AutoStick) gear is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed.

On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without speed control.

WARNING!

Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can't maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control. An accident could be the result. Don't use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink ^® replaces up to three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security systems. The HomeLink ^® unit operates off of your vehicle's battery.

NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active.

WARNING!

Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a "stop and reverse" feature as required by federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.

WARNING!

Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.

Programming HomeLink®

Before You Begin

If you have not trained any of the HomeLink® buttons, erase all channels before you begin training.

To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red HomeLink® indicator begins to flash, or the EVIC message changes from "CLEARING CHANNELS" to "CHANNELS CLEARED."

It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed

to HomeLink ^® for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage while training.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (3–8 cm) from the HomeLink® buttons while keeping the indicator in view.

For optimal training, point the battery end of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink ^® .

1. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink® button and the hand-held transmitter button until the until the red HomeLink® indicator changes from a slow to a rapid flash rate or the EVIC display changes from "CHANNEL # TRAINING" to "CHANNEL # TRAINED."

Then release both the HomeLink ^® and hand-held transmitter buttons.

If the EVIC display states "DID NOT TRAIN" repeat Step 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.

It may take up to 30 seconds, or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open & close while you train.

NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step #3 with procedures noted in the "Gate Operator/Canadian Programming" section.

1. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® button. If the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now state "CHANNEL # TRANSMIT."

If the EVIC display still states "CHANNEL # TRAINING" repeat Step 3.

If the red HomeLink® indicator blinks rapidly for two seconds and then remains constant, continue with the next section: "Programming A Rolling Code."

NOTE: After training a HomeLink® channel, if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink® and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so, proceed to the heading "Programming A Rolling Code System."

5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM

At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the "learn" or "training" button.

This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (IT IS NOT THE BUTTON NORMALLY USED TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE DOOR).

1 — Garage Door Opener 2 — Training Button

1. Firmly press and release the "learn" or "training" button. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the "Learn" button has been pressed.

150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for 2 seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and activates, programming is complete.

If the device does not activate, press the button a third time (for 2 seconds) to complete the training.

NOTE: If you are have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT ERASE THE CHANNELS.

Canadian Programming/Gate Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "time-out" in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor.

If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator, replace "Programming HomeLink" Step 3 with the following:

1. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button while you press and release - every two seconds ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter until HomeLink® has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The red HomeLink® indicator will change from a slow to rapid

flash, and the EVIC display in the cluster will change from "CHANNEL # TRAINING" to "CHANNEL # TRAINED."

If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in at this time.

Then proceed with the remaining steps.

Using HomeLink®

To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Buttons

To re-program a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button for 20 seconds until the red indicator starts to flash, or the EVIC display states "CHANNEL # TRAINING." DO NOT RELEASE THE BUTTON.
3. WITHOUT RELEASING THE BUTTON, proceed with PROGRAMMING HOMELINK Step #2 and follow all remaining steps.

Security

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle.

152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states "CHANNELS CLEARED." Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.

The HomeLink ^® Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active.

Troubleshooting Tips

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink ^® , here are some of the most common solutions:

• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
• Press the Learn Button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember to plug it back in?

If you are have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

General Information

This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference
2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation

NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

The term "IC" before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

ABS aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.

NOTE: ABS improves steering control of the vehicle during hard braking maneuvers.

WARNING!

• ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

Your vehicle is equipped with the advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS) Brake Assist System (BAS), and Electronic Stability Program (ESP). All four systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions, and are commonly referred to as ESP.

Traction Control System (TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.

Brake Assist System (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle's braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

• BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.

• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
- Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ESP/TCS Indicator Light

The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” located in the instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

WARNING!

• Electronic Stability Program (ESP) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157

ESP Operating Modes

The ESP system has 2 available operating modes.

ESP ON

This is the normal operating mode for ESP. Whenever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving situations. ESP should only be turned to "Partial ESP" for specific reasons as noted below.

Traction Control Switch

PARTIAL ESP

This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the "ESP OFF" button.

When in "Partial ESP" mode, the TCS portion of ESP has been disabled, the thresholds for ESP activation are

raised, and the "ESP/TCS Indicator Light" will be illuminated. This mode is intended to be used for a more spirited driving experience, or if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin that ESP would normally allow is required.

ESP OFF To turn ESP on again, momentarily depress the "ESP OFF" button.

WARNING!

In the Partial ESP mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are desensitized. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable.

NOTE: To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the "Partial ESP" mode by pressing the "ESP OFF" button. Once the

situation requiring ESP to be switched to the "Partial ESP" mode is overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the "ESP OFF" button. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.

ESP/BAS Warning Light and ESP/TCS Indicator Light

The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator. The yellow "ESP/BAS Warning Lamp" and the yellow "ESP/TCS Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position. They should both go out with the engine running. If the "ESP/BAS Warning Lamp" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or BAS system, or both. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159

NOTE:

• The "ESP Indicator Light" and the "ESP/BAS Warning Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
  • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation.

ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel. The adjustable pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position. The switch is located on the drivers door trim panel next to the power seat switches.

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SWITCH

Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward (toward the front of the vehicle).

Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward (toward the driver).

• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.

160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• The pedals can be adjusted while driving.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or when the Speed Control is ON.Amessage will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out ("Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged" or "Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse").

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with memory seat feature, your remote keyless entry transmitter or memory seat buttons on the driver's door panel can be used to recall the adjustable pedals to saved positions.

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal's path.

REAR PARK SENSE SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The Rear Park Assist System provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and the detected obstacle when backing up. When backing up the driver should also use the inside rearview and outside mirrors.

The Rear Park Assist System will remember the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the RUN/ON position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161

The Rear Park Assist System can be active only when the transaxle shift lever is in R (Reverse). If the Rear Park Assist System is enabled at this shift position, the system will be active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or above. The system will be active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).

Rear Park Assist Sensors

The four Rear Park Assist Sensors, located in the rear fascia, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The monitored area seems oval in shape. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 11.8 inches (30 cm) up to 59 inches (150 cm) from the rear fascia in the horizontal direction, depending on the location and orientation of the obstacle and the type of obstacle.

Top-down view of a car's rearview compartment showing the dashboard and seat area (no text or symbols visible)

Rear Park Assist LEDs

162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Park Assist Warning Display

The Rear Park Assist Warning Display, located in the headliner near the liftgate glass, provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia and the detected obstacle.

When the ignition is changed to the RUN/ON position, the warning display will turn ON all of its LEDs for about 1 second. Each side of the warning display has 6 yellow and 2 red LEDs. The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the red LED is ON.

The driver can view the LEDs either through the rear view mirror or by looking at the display above the rear window.

The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles. The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES

DISPLAY LED OB	STACLE DISTANCE FROM: LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL
	REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER
1st LED 78.7 in.	(200 cm) Yellow Yes, half second
2nd LED 51.2 in.	(130 cm) Yellow None
3rd LED 45.3 in.	(115 cm) Yellow None
4th LED 31.5 in.	(80 cm) 39.3 in. (100 cm)	Yellow None
5th LED 25.5 in.	(65 cm) 33.5 in.	(85 cm) Yellow None
6th LED	20 in. (50 cm)	27.6 in. (70 cm)	Yellow	None
7th LED	16 in. (40 cm)	19.7 in. (50 cm) Red	Red	Yes, intermittent
8th LED	6 in. (15 cm)	11.8 in. (30 cm)	Red	Yes, continuous

NOTE: The Rear Park Sense System will MUTE the radio, if on, when the audible warning is activated.

WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Park Sense System. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using the Rear Park Sense System, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns the red LEDs ON. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• To avoid vehicle damage the Rear Park Sense System should only be used as a parking aid and is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small objects. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle.
• To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using the Rear Park Sense System to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver look over his/her shoulder when using the Rear Park Sense System.

NOTE:

• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep the system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of the system.

If "Service Park Sense System" appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) after making sure the rear bumper is clean please see your authorized dealer.

Enable/Disable the Rear Park Assist System — If Equipped

The Rear Park Assist System can be enabled and disabled with a switch located on the switch bank of the instrument panel. When the switch is pressed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will display the "PARK ASSIST DISABLED" message. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in Section 4 of this manual. When the shift lever is changed to R (Reverse) and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the message.

The Rear Park Assist Switch LED will be ON when the Rear Park Assist System is disabled or defective. The Rear Park Assist Switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled.

The system can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), if equipped. For details, refer to “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information enter (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.

Service the Rear Park Assist System

When the Rear Park Assist System is defective, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the "SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM" message. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in Section 4 of this manual.

If "SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM" appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) after making sure the rear bumper is clean please see your authorized dealer.

Cleaning the Rear Park Assist System

Clean the Rear Park Assist Sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors, otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

REAR CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Rear Camera system that allows you to see an on-screen image (located in the center of the instrument cluster) of the rear of your vehicle whenever it is put into R (Reverse). The camera is located in the light bar over the rear license plate.

NOTE: Refer to "Setting Display Properties" under "System Settings" in the Navigation User's Manual for instructions regarding navigation screen brightness adjustments.

Use the following steps to access the Rear Backup Camera feature:

1. Start the engine.
2. Place shift lever in R (Reverse).
3. Wait one to two seconds, and the camera view will display on the instrument cluster.

NOTE: The camera view will display only while the vehicle is in R (Reverse).

1. Perform a visual check of the rear area.

NOTE: CHECK ENTIRE SURROUNDINGS before backing up.

1. Backup as necessary.
2. Place the sift lever in P (Park) or D (Drive) to exit the Rear Backup Camera system.

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Camera System. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

• To avoid vehicle damage the Rear Camera System should only be used as a parking aid and is unable to view every obstacle, or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using the Rear Camera System to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using the Rear Camera System.

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or anything else builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED

The overhead console can contain courtesy/reading lights, an optional universal garage door opener (HomeLink®), storage for sunglasses, optional power sunroof switches and an optional power liftgate switch.

Top-down view of a car air conditioner unit with control buttons and fan (no visible text or symbols)

Overhead Console

80ee5d20

Courtesy/Reading Lights

At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/reading lights.

Press the lens to turn these lights on. Press a second time to turn the lights off.

The lights also turn on when a front door, a rear door or the liftgate is opened. The lights will also turn on when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed.

Sunglasses Storage

At the rear of the overhead console, a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses.

Press the door latch to open the compartment. The door will slowly rotate to an open position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

The power sunroof buttons are located between the sun visors on the overhead console.

Power Sunroof buttons

Press and hold the "OPEN" button rearward to fully open the sunroof. The sunroof can be stopped at any position between closed and full open. Momentarily pressing the "OPEN" button rearward will activate the Express Open Feature, causing the sunroof to open automatically.

Press and hold the "VENT" button to open the vent. The sunroof can be stopped at any position between closed and full vent. To close the sunroof from the vent position, press and hold the "CLOSE" button forward. Releasing the button will stop the movement of the sunroof and the sunroof will remain in the partial vent position until the button is pushed forward again.

NOTE: The power sunroof buttons remain active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition button has been turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Express Open Feature

The sunroof is equipped with an intermediate stop or comfort stop position. This feature is designed to eliminate wind buffeting at vehicle speeds between 20-40 mph (32-64 km/h). To operate this feature, momentarily press the "OPEN" button rearward to activate the Express Open Feature and the glass will automatically stop at the comfort stop position. Pressing the button rearward again will fully open the sunroof.

During the Express Open operation, any movement of the button will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a partial open position. Again, momentarily pressing the button rearward will activate the Express Open Feature.

To close the sunroof, press and hold the "CLOSE" button forward. Again, any release of the button will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open condition until the button is pushed forward again.

The sunshade can be opened manually. It will also open as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.

WARNING!

• NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. Don't leave the keys in the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or any object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.

Sunroof Comfort Position — If Equipped

If equipped, some model sunroofs will stop at a predetermined comfort position — not allowing the sunroof to open to the full retracted glass position. The comfort position stops the sunroof glass at approximately 3/4 open position. This will allow for minimal wind buffeting.

172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Sunroof Maintenance

Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel.

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS

There are two 12 volt power outlets located on the instrument panel below the radio. The driver's side outlet is controlled by the ignition switch and the passenger side outlet is connected directly to the battery. The driver's side outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit (if equipped with an optional Smoker's Package).

Interior view of a car dashboard with air vent, control panel, and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Front Power Outlets

A third outlet is located on the back of the front center console near the floor, and is also controlled by the ignition switch.

A fourth outlet is located on the driver's side, in the rear cargo area and is also controlled by the ignition switch.

The outlets include tethered caps labeled with a key or battery symbol indicating the power source. The passenger side instrument panel and center console outlets are powered directly from the battery, items plugged into these outlets may discharge the battery and/or prevent engine starting.

The passenger side and center console outlets are protected by an automatic reset circuit breaker. The automatic circuit breaker restores power when the overload is removed.

NOTE: If desired, the fourth power outlet in the rear cargo area can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition switch in the OFF position.

Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off

CAUTION!

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage.

174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CUPHOLDERS

Front Seat Cupholders

The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the center console. Push down on the forward edge of the console to release the cupholders. Press the cover up when the cupholders are no longer needed.

Close-up of a car's seat frame with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

Six Passenger Seating Cupholders

Second Row Seat Cupholders

On vehicles equipped with five passenger seating the second row seat cupholders are located in middle of the seatback armrest. Pull down on the armrest to access the cupholders. Push the armrest up when the cupholders are no longer needed.

Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt and dashboard compartment with an arrow indicating airflow direction (no text or symbols)

Five Passenger Seating Cupholders

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175

On vehicles equipped with six passenger seating the second row seat cupholders are located in the forward edge of the center console located between the second row seats. Push down on the forward edge of the console to release the cupholders. Press the cover up when the cupholders are no longer needed.

Third Row Seat Cupholders — If Equipped

There are cupholders located in each rear trim panel for the third row seat passengers.

STORAGE

Console Features

The center consoles may be equipped with a tissue holder mounted on the underside of the cover. The bottom of the console bins may also have built in holders for compact discs or cassette tapes.

Rear Cargo Storage Bin — If Equipped

The storage bin is located in the floor of the rear cargo area. To open lift up on the handle.

Top-down view of a car's rear backrest showing the grille and vent, with a black arrow pointing to the grille (no text or symbols)

Rear Storage Bin

176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped

To cover the cargo area:

1. Fold down the third row seatbacks.
2. Unfold the cargo cover extensions and lock into place.
3. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots located on the trim panel behind the second row seat-backs.
4. Grasp the center portion of the cover flap. Pull it over the cargo area.
5. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover flap into the slots on the rear trim panel.
6. The liftgate may be opened or closed with the cargo cover in place.

WARNING!

In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting. Do not store in the vehicle.

Stowed Position

1. Fold down the third row seatbacks.
2. Fold the cargo cover extensions to their stowed position and lock into place.

3. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots located on the trim panel behind the third row seatbacks.

4. Grasp the center portion of the cover flap. Pull it over the cargo area.

5. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover flap into the slots on the rear trim panel.
6. The liftgate may be opened or closed with the cargo cover in place.

Cargo Tie-Down Hooks

The tie-downs located on cargo area floor and on the rear trim panels should be used to safely secure loads when vehicle is moving.

WARNING!

• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
• The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:

- Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.

178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

- Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway.

- Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.

WARNING!

To help protect against personal injury, passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat belts.

ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED

The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.

Diagram of a curved surface with two arrows indicating direction, no text or symbols present

Roof Rack

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179

Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars. The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.

To move the cross bars, press the upper edge of each cross bar button, then move the cross bar to the desired position, keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. This is can be done with one person standing on each side of the vehicle, moving the cross bar at the same time. Once the cross bar is in place, press the lower edge of the cross bar button to lock it into position.

Attempt to move the crossbar again to ensure that it has properly locked into position.

NOTE: To reduce the amount of wind noise when the cross bars are not in use, move both cross bars next to each other towards the rear of the vehicle in the rear most position.

The tie down holes on the cross bar ends should always be used to tie down the load. Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached.

CAUTION!

• Crossbars should remain equally spaced or parallel at any luggage rack position for proper function. Noncompliance could result in damage to the luggage rack, cargo and/or vehicle.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to loads. This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.

WARNING!

Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the Roof Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.

LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM

The automatic load leveling system will provide a level riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions.

A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions.

If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The vehicle must be driven to reset the system.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

■ Instrument Panel And Controls ..... 1 8 4

■ Base Instrument Cluster ..... 1 8 5

■ Premium Instrument Cluster ..... 1 8 6

■ Instrument Cluster Descriptions ..... 1 8 7

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped 199

□ Oil Change Required ..... 2 0 2

□ Customer Programmable Features — If Equipped....203

□ Compass Display — If Equipped .....207

□ Mini-Trip Functions — If Equipped ..... 208

■ Setting The Analog Clock .....209

Electronic Digital Clock 209

□ Clock Setting Procedure ..... 2 1 0

■ Radio General Information....210

□ Radio Broadcast Signals ..... 2 1 0

□ Two Types Of Signals .....211

□ Electrical Disturbances .....211

□ AM Reception 211

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

□ FM Reception....2 1 1

■ Sales Code RAH — AM & FM Stereo Radio With CD Player And CD/DVD Changer Controls . . . . 2 1 2

□ Radio Operation....2 1 2

□ CD Player Operation....2 1 6

□ CD/DVD Changer Operation....2 1 8

□ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ..... 2 1 8

☐ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play) 2 2 0

■ Sales Code REV — AM & FM Stereo Radio With CD Player And CD/DVD Changer Controls . . . 2 2 2

□ Radio Operation....2 2 2

□ CD Player Operation....2 2 6

□ CD/DVD Changer Operation ..... 2 2 8

□ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ..... 2 2 8

☐ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play) 2 3 0

☐ Operating Instructions — MP3 Player, Portable Walkman 2 3 1

☐ Operating Instructions — Video Games/Camcorders 231

■ 6 Disc CD/DVD Changer (RDV) — If Equipped .232

☐ Operating Instructions — CD/DVD Changer ..233

□ Eject (EJT) Button ..... 2 3 5

□ Operating Instructions — Remote Control . . . . 2 3 5

□ Operating Instructions — Video Screen . . . . . . 2 3 9

□ Operating Instructions — Headphones ..... 2 4 1

□ Operating Instructions — Auxiliary Input . . . . 2 4 3

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183

■ Navigation System — If Equipped ..... 2 4 4
■ Satellite Radio — If Equipped ..... 2 4 5

□ystem Activation....245
□ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ENS/SID) 245
□ Selecting Satellite Mode In RBB, RAH, REV And RBK Radios....2 4 6
□ Selecting Satellite Mode In RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1 And RBQ Radios....2 4 6
□ Selecting a Channel ..... 2 4 7
□ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels ..... 2 4 7
□ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button (If Equipped) 2 4 7
□ PTY Button "Scan" .....247
□ PTY Button "Seek" .....248

□Satellite Antenna....248
□ Reception Quality....248

■ Remote Sound System Controls ..... 2 4 9

□ Radio Operation....249
□ CD Player 249

■ CD/DVD Disc Maintenance....250
■ Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ..... 2 5 0
■ Climate Controls .... 2 5 0

□ Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System....2 5 1
□ Mode Control....2 5 2
□ Manual Air Conditioning Operation .....256
□ Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control . . .259
□ Electric Rear Window Defroster .....269

184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS

1. Air Outlets
2. Instrument Cluster
3. Electronic Vehicle Information Center*
4. Navigation System*
5. Analog Clock*

6. Hazard Switch

7. Passenger Airbag Disable Light*

8. Climate Controls

9. Radio

10. Glove Box

11. CD/DVD Player*

12. Power Outlets

13. Ignition Switch

14. Theft Alarm / Immobilizer Light

15. Trip Odometer Button

* If Equipped

8158bd19

BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

819218cb

PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

8192193b

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS

1. Voltage Light

This light monitors the electrical system voltage.

The light should turn on momentarily as the light is started. If the light stays on or turns on while g, it indicates a problem with the charging system. Indiate service should be obtained.

2. Temperature Gauge

The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads "H", pull over in a safe area as soon as possible and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the "H", and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately, and call for service.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.

3. Fuel Gauge

The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The Low Fuel Light will turn on when the fuel level reaches approximately 2 to 4 gallons (7 to 15 liters) this light will remain on until fuel is added.

4. Turn Signal Indicators

The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated.

If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about one mile with the turn signals on, a chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.

5. Speedometer

Indicates vehicle speed.

6. Anti-Lock Brake Light

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system

is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

7. Brake System Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on, it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, there is a low brake fluid level or there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is

indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

8. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light

If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, apply as little throttle as possible. While driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road con-nd do not switch off the ESP, or TCS.

NOTE: Extended heavy use of Traction Control may cause the system to deactivate and turn on the Traction Control Light. This is to prevent overheating of the brake system and is a normal condition. The system will remain disabled for about 4 minutes until the brakes have cooled. The system will automatically reactivate and turn off the Traction Control Light.

9. Tachometer

The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions-per-minute (rpm. x 1000) for each gear range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator.

10. Trip Odometer Button

Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings. The word TRIP and either "A" or "B" will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers. The odometer must be in trip mode to reset.

11. Transmission Range Indicator

This display indicator shows the automatic transmission gear selection.

12. AutoStick Light

This display indicator illuminates when the gearshift lever is moved to the AutoStick position.

13. Odometer/Trip Odometer

The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven. U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined.

The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and release the Trip Odometer button. To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odometer to be reset then push and hold the button until the display resets (approximately 2 seconds).

Vehicle Warning Messages

When the appropriate conditions exist, vehicle warning messages will display in the odometer.

NOTE: If the instrument cluster is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), then all warnings will only display in the EVIC. (Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in this section for specific messages).

gASCAP

If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change in the evaporative system, or the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the words "gASCAP" will display in the odometer. If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn off the "gASCAP" message. (Refer to "Onboard Diagnostic System — OBDII" in Section 7 of this manual for more information). If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized dealer service center as soon as possible.

Change Oil

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Change Oil” message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) perform the following procedure:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position (Do not start the engine).

2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.

14. Cruise Indicator

CRUISE This indicator shows that the Speed Control System is ON.

15. Malfunction Indicator Light

This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the condition checked promptly.

Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.

The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert you to serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.

16. High Beam Light

This light shows that the headlights are on high beam. Pull the Multi-Function lever towards the g wheel to switch the headlights from high or low

194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

17. Navigation Screen/Rear View Camera — If Equipped

The navigation system provides maps, turn identification, selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes. Refer to your "Navigation User's Manual" for detailed operating instructions.

The Rear View Camera system uses the Navigator Screen to display the area behind the vehicle. Camera view will display only while the vehicle is in R (Reverse).

18. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped

This light shows the front fog lights are ON.

19. Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light shows low engine oil pressure. The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the

vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A continuous chime will sound when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

20. Seat Belt Reminder Light

When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously. Refer to "Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlertTM)" in the Occupant Restraints section for more information.

21. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

NOTE: Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or

alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

NOTE: Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels (the spare is not monitored or equipped with a sensor). TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.

For additional information on TPMS, refer to Section 5 — Starting and Operating, "Tire Pressure Monitoring System" of this manual.

For additional information on Tire Pressures, refer to Section 5 — Starting and Operating, "Tire Inflation Pressures" of this manual.

22. Airbag Light

This light turns on and remains on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

23. Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display — If Equipped

When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) messages.

24. Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If this light is accompanied by a continuous

chime, the engine temperature is critically hot, and the vehicle should be turned off immediately. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible.

25. Liftgate Ajar — If Equipped

This light turns on if the liftgate is not completely closed.

26. Door Ajar Light — If Equipped

This light turns on if a door is not completely closed.

27. Washer Fluid Light — If Equipped

This light turns on when the washer fluid level falls below approximately 1/4 filled. The light will remain on until fluid is added.

198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

28. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Warning Light/Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light — If Equipped

ESP BAS

The malfunction lamp for the ESP is combined with BAS. The yellow "ESP/BAS Warning Lamp" comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position. They should go out with the engine running. If the "ESP/BAS Warning Lamp" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

29. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC.) Light

This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control system. If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when

the vehicle has completely stopped and the gear selector is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable, however, see your dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

30. All-Wheel-Drive Failure Indicator Light — If AWD equipped

This light monitors the All-Wheel-Drive AWD! (AWD) system. The light will come on, for a bulb check, when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as 3 seconds.

When lit solid: There is an AWD system fault. AWD performance will be at a reduced level. Service the AWD system soon.

When blinking: The AWD system is temporarily disabled due to overload condition.

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) consists of the following:

• Vehicle information warning message displays
- Tire Pressure Monitor System — If Equipped
- Customer programmable features
- Compass display
- Mini-Trip functions

Pressing the MENU button will change the displayed programming features. Pressing the STEP button will display the available choices. Pressing the MENU button a second time accepts a selected choice.

When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following messages.

• LEFT/RIGHT TURN SIGNAL ON (with a continuous warning chime)
• INVALID KEY & FOB (with a single chime)
• PARK ASSIST DISABLED
  • SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
  • SERVICE IMMOBILIZER (with a single chime)
  • KEY FOB BATTERY LOW (with a single chime)
  • KEY & FOB PROGRAMMED (with a single chime)

200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• PROGRAM KEY & FOB
- MEMORY #1/#2 POSITION SET (with a single chime)
- MEMORY #1/#2 POS SELECTED
- MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED VEHICLE NOT IN PARK (with a single chime)
- SET INHIBITED DUE TO MOTION (with a single chime)
• FOB LINKED (with a single chime)
• FOB UNLINKED (with a single chime)
- PARK BRAKE ENGAGED (with a single chime)
- LOW BRAKE FLUID (with a single chime)
- LOW FUEL (with a single chime)
- MENU IN PARK ONLY
• LIST # ALERT MESSAGES

• UNLOCK TO OPEN LIFTGATE (with a single chime)
• PUT IN PARK FOR LIFTGATE (with a single chime)
  • TOO COLD FOR PWR LIFTGATE (with a single chime)
  • TOO HOT FOR PWR LIFTGATE (with a single chime)
  • PERFORM SERVICE (with a single chime)
• LEFT/RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR (one or more, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• LEFT/RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR (one or more, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)
  • DOOR(S) AJAR (with a single chime)
  • DOOR(S) AND GATE AJAR (with a single chime)
• LIFT GATE AJAR (with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201

• WASHER FLUID LOW (with a single chime)
  • PEDAL ADJUST DISABLED CRUISE ENGAGED
  • PEDAL ADJUST DISABLED VEHICLE IN REVERSE
• CHANNEL 1, 2, OR 3 TRANSMIT (with a single chime)
• CHANNEL 1, 2, OR 3 TRAINING (with a single chime)
  • CHANNEL 1, 2, OR 3 TRAINED (with a single chime)

• CLEARING CHANNELS
  • CHANNELS CLEARED
  • CHANNELS DEFAULTED
  • DID NOT TRAIN

• 1,2,3 OR 4 TIRE(S) LOW PRESSURE (Refer to "Tire Pressure Monitor System" in the "Starting And Operating, Tire Section")

• SERVICE TIRE SYSTEM SOON (Refer to "Tire Pressure Monitor System" in the "Starting And Operating, Tire Section")
• TCS SUSPENDED (Traction Control System, with a graphic and single chime)
• TCS ACTIVE (Traction Control System, with a graphic)
• SERVICE TCS SYSTEM (Traction Control System, with a graphic and single chime)

Oil Change Required

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the Menu button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) perform the following procedure:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position (Do not start the engine).

2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" position.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.

NOTE:

• The oil change indicator system will not monitor the time since the last oil change. Change the engine oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
• Change the engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off-road for an extended period.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichever comes first.

Customer Programmable Features — If Equipped

Press the MENU button until one of the following display choices appears:

Language?

When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip computer functions and navigation system. Press the STEP button while in this display selects English, Francais, or Espanol. As you continue the displayed information will be shown in the selected language.

Park Assist System? ON/OFF

When this feature is selected the system scans for objects behind the vehicle using four sensors located in the rear bumper. Objects can be detected from up to 59 inches (150 cm). Pressing the "STEP" button while in this display will disable/enable the Rear Park Assist System. The EVIC will display the following message: PARK

ASSIST DISABLED after the feature has been disabled and SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM if there is a problem with the system.

Service Interval

When this feature is selected a service interval between 2,000 miles (3 200 km) and 6,000 miles (10 000 km) in 500 mile (800 km) increments may be selected. Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select distances between 2,000 miles (3 200 km) and 6,000 miles (10 000 km) in 500 mile (800 km) increments.

Reset Service Distance (Displays Only if Service Interval was Changed)

When this feature is selected the current accumulated service distance can be reset to the newly selected service interval. Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select "Yes" or "No."

204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Use factory Settings?

When in this display you may select to use the factory settings and no programmable features will be offered.

Tilt Mirrors in Reverse? (Available with Memory Seat Only)

When this feature is selected the outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into the Reverse position. The outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of Reverse position. Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select "Yes" or "No".

Auto Door Locks?

When this feature is selected, all doors and the liftgate lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph (25 km/h). Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select "Yes" or "No."

Auto Unlock On Exit?

When this feature is selected all the vehicle's doors will unlock when the driver's door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position. Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select "Yes" or "No."

Remote Unlock Driver's Door 1st?

When this feature is selected only the driver's door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button and require a second press to unlock the remaining locked doors and liftgate. When REMOTE UNLOCK ALL DOORS is selected all of the doors and the liftgate will unlock at the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button. Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select DRIVER'S DOOR 1ST or ALL DOORS.

Remote Linked To Memory? (Available with Memory Seat Only)

When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror, and radio settings will return to the memory set position when the remote keyless entry "Unlock" button is pressed. If this feature is not selected then the memory seat, mirror, and radio settings can only return to the memory set position using the door mounted switch. Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select "Yes" or "No."

Sound Horn On Lock?

When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry "Lock" button is pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock/unlock feature. Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select "Yes" or "No."

Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock?

When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select "Yes" or "No."

Headlamp Delay

When this feature is selected the driver can choose, when exiting the vehicle, to have the headlamps remain on for 30, 60, or 90 seconds, or not remain on. Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select 30, 60, 90, or OFF.

Headlamp On With Wipers? (Available with Auto Headlights Only)

When this feature is selected and the headlight switch has at least once been moved to the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on in approximately 10 seconds when the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also

206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on in this way. Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select "Yes" or "No."

NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the brightness, refer to "Lights" in this section.

Power Accessory Delay?

When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, hands-free system, DVD video system, power sunroof, and power outlets will remain active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle door or liftgate will cancel this feature.

Easy Exit Seat? (Available with Memory Seat Only)

This feature provides automatic driver's seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the vehicle.

The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select "Yes" or "No." The seat will return to the memorized seat location (if REMOTE LINK TO MEMORY is set to YES) when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to unlock the door. For more information refer to "Easy Entry/Exit Seat in the Driver Memory Seat section.

Display U.S. or Metric?

Pressing the US/M button will change the EVIC, odometer, navigation system and A/C Control units from US to Metric.

Compass Display — If Equipped

This display provides one of eight compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing.

Automatic Compass Calibration

This compass is self-calibrating which eliminates the need to manually calibrate the compass. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display “COMPASS CALIBRATING” until the compass is calibrated. The compass will function normally.

To calibrate the compass, drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360° circles, under 5 mph (8 km/h) in an area free from large metal objects, until the "COMPASS CALIBRATING" message turns off.

Manual Compass Calibration

If the compass appears erratic, inaccurate or abnormal, you may wish to manually calibrate the compass. Prior to calibration, make sure the proper zone is selected.

To put into a Calibration Mode: Turn on the ignition switch and set the display to Compass. Press the RESET button for at least 10 seconds until the "COMPASS CALIBRATING" message appears. Release the MENU button and drive the vehicle in one or more complete three, 360^ circles, under 5 mph (8 km/h) in an area free from large metal objects, until the "COMPASS CALIBRATING" message turns off.

Compass Variance

Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North. In some areas of the country, the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings. In order to ensure accuracy, the compass variance should be properly set according to the compass variance zone that the vehicle is in.

208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from the overhead console.

To set the variance: Turn the ignition switch ON and set the display to Compass. Press the MENU button for approximately 5 seconds but no more than 10 seconds. The "COMPASS VARIANCE" message and the last variance zone number will be displayed. Press the STEP button to select the proper variance zone as shown in the map. Press the RESET button to set the new variance zone and resume normal operation.

Mini-Trip Functions — If Equipped

This displays information on the following:

• Average Fuel Economy (ECO AVG)

Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. The minimum average fuel economy that will be displayed on reset is 0.3 mpg.

• Distance To Empty (DTE)

Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is determined using the MPG for the last few minutes.

- Off Mode

Shows a blank display.

- Step Button

Push this button to cycle through all the Mini-trip functions.

To Reset The Display

Pressing and releasing the Reset button once will clear the resettable function currently being displayed. The resettable function is average fuel economy. Reset will only occur if the resettable function is currently being displayed.

SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK

To set the analog clock, at the top center of the instrument panel, press and hold the button until the setting is correct. The clock will adjust slowly at first and then quicker the longer the button is held.

ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK

The clock and radio each use the display panel built into the radio. A digital readout shows the time in hours and minutes.

210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

On vehicles equipped with an Analog Clock the radio time display will function as follows:

• Radio On — Radio clock will display for approximately 5 seconds after button is pressed, then default back to radio frequency.
• Radio Off — Radio clock will display for approximately 5 seconds after button is pressed, then default back to blank screen.

The following radio time options can be changed by your dealer service department:

• Radio On — Radio clock will continue to be displayed after button is pressed.
• Radio Off — Radio clock will displayed continuously.

Clock Setting Procedure

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC position and press the time button. Using the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object, press either the hour (H) or minute (M) buttons on the radio.
2. Press the H button to set hours or the M button to set minutes. The time setting will increase each time you press a button.

RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION

Radio Broadcast Signals

Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car radios have performance limitations, due to mobile operation and natural phenomena, which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help

you understand and save you concern about these "apparent" malfunctions, you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio signals.

Two Types of Signals

There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.

Electrical Disturbances

Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude, and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal.

AM Reception

AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines and neon signs.

FM Reception

Because FM transmission is based on frequency variations, interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear, which is the major feature of FM radio.

NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped) will remain active for up to 90 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off, depending upon the accessory delay setting. Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.

212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SALES CODE RAH — AM & FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER AND CD/DVD CHANGER CONTROLS

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower left side of your radio faceplate.

8141b8a1

RAH radio

Radio Operation

Power/Volume Control

Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the volume control clockwise to increase the volume.

NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

PTY (Program Type)

Pressing the INFO button once while in FM mode will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time out, the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the TUNE button within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.

Toggle the TUNE button to select the following format types:

Program Type Radio	Display
Adult Hits Adult Hit
Classical Classical
Classic Rock Classic Rock
College College
Country Country
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
Foreign Language Language
News News
Nostalgia Nostalgia
Oldies Oldies
Personality Personality
Public	Public
Rhythm and Blues	R & B
Religious Music	Religious Music

Program Type Radio	Display
Religious Talk	Religious Talk
Rock	Rock
Soft	Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues	Soft R&B
Sports	Sports
Talk	Talk
Top 40	Top 40
Weather	Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY function only operates when in the FM and Satellite (if equipped) modes.

The radio display will flash "SEEK" and the selected PTY program type when searching for the next PTY station. If

214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

no station is found with the selected PTY program type, the radio will return to the last preset station.

If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

Mode

Press the MODE button to select between, AM, FM, CD, CD/DVD changer or the Satellite Radio (if equipped). When the Satellite Radio (if equipped) is selected "SA" will appear in your radio display.

A disc may remain in the radio while in the Satellite or radio mode.

Seek

Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next station in either the AM, FM or Satellite mode. Press the top of the button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding the button in will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.

Tuning

Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button, the radio will continue to tune until you release the button. The frequency will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is pressed.

Balance

The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker balance. Press the AUDIO button, select BALANCE, then press SEEK + or SEEK - to adjust the balance.

Fade

The Fade control provides for balance between the front and rear speakers. Press the AUDIO button, select FADE, then press SEEK + or SEEK - to adjust the fade balance.

Tone Control

The Bass and/or Treble controls sound for the desired tone. Press the AUDIO button, select Bass or TREBLE, then press SEEK + or SEEK - to increase or decrease amplification of the band.

To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push-button memory, press the SET button. SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the push-button you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a station is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be locked into push-button memory.

You may add a second station to each push-button by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM stations to be locked into memory. You can recall the stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the push-button twice.

To Change From Clock To Radio Mode

Press the TIME button to change the display between radio frequency and time.

General Information

This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

CD Player Operation

NOTE:

• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position and the volume control ON before the CD player will operate.
• This Radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

Inserting The Compact Disc

CAUTION!

This CD player will accept only 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism.

You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF, the display will show the time of day. If you insert a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will show the time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out.

If the power is ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track one.

Seek

Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection.

EJT — Eject

Press the EJT button and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to the radio mode.

If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.

The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF.

FF/TUNE/RW

Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.

RND — Random Play

Press the RND button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.

Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.

Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks. Press the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward feature. If TUNE RW is pressed, the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.

Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.

218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CD/DVD Changer Operation

Press the MODE button to select between the CD player and the optional remote CD/DVD changer.

Time

Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed CD or DVD playing time to time of day.

Notes On Playing MP3 Files

The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

Supported media (disc types)

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.

Supported medium formats (file systems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.

When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of directory levels: 15
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

• Level 1: 12 (including a separator "." anda3 character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator "." anda3 character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal

CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs created with an option such as "keep disc open after writing" are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times.

Supported MP3 file formats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.

MPEG Specification	Sampling Frequency (kHz)	Bit rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3	48, 44.1, 32	320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3	24, 22.05, 16	160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.

220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Playback of MP3 files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
- Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs
- Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc.

Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play)

SEEK Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)

Pressing the SEEK + button plays the next MP3 File. Pressing the SEEK - button plays the beginning of the MP3 file. Pressing the button within the first ten seconds plays the previous file.

INFO Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)

Press and INFO button while playing MP3 disc. The radio scrolls through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).

Press the INFO button once more to return to "elapsed time" priority mode.

RW/FF (CD Mode For MP3 Play)

Press the FF side of the button to move forward through the MP3 selection. Press the RW side of the button to move back through the MP3 selection.

AM/FM Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)

Switches back to Radio mode.

RND Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)

Pressing this button plays files randomly.

DIR Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)

Press the DIR Button to display folders, when playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure. Press DISC up (button 1) or DISC down (button 5) to move through the folders. Press the SET button to select a folder.

Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If Equipped)

Refer to Hands Free Phone section of the Owner's Manual.

Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If Equipped)

Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner's Manual.

Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment System (VES®) (If Equipped)

Refer to 6 Disc CD/DVD Changer (RDV) section of the Owner's Manual.

222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SALES CODE REV — AM & FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER AND CD/DVD CHANGER CONTROLS

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower left side of your radio faceplate.

817a88ea

REV Radio

Radio Operation

Power/Volume Control

Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the volume control clockwise to increase the volume.

NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

PTY (Program Type)

Pressing the INFO button once while in FM mode will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time out, the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the TUNE button within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.

Toggle the TUNE button to select the following format types:

Program Type Radio	Display
Adult Hits Adult Hit
Classical Classical
Classic Rock Classic Rock
College College
Country Country
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
Foreign Language Language
News News
Nostalgia Nostalgia
Oldies Oldies
Personality Personality
Public	Public
Rhythm and Blues	R & B
Religious Music	Religious Music

Program Type Radio	Display
Religious Talk	Religious Talk
Rock	Rock
Soft	Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues	Soft R & B
Sports	Sports
Talk	Talk
Top 40	Top 40
Weather	Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY function only operates when in the FM and Satellite (if equipped) modes.

The radio display will flash "SEEK" and the selected PTY program type when searching for the next PTY station. If

224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

no station is found with the selected PTY program type, the radio will return to the last preset station.

If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

Mode

Press the MODE button to select between, AM, FM, CD, CD/DVD changer or the Satellite Radio (if equipped). When the Satellite Radio (if equipped) is selected "SA" will appear in your radio display.

A disc may remain in the radio while in the Satellite or radio mode.

Seek

Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next station in either the AM, FM or Satellite mode. Press the top of the button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding the button in will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.

Tuning

Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button, the radio will continue to tune until you release the button. The frequency will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is pressed.

Balance

The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker balance. Press the AUDIO button, select BALANCE, then press SEEK + or SEEK - to adjust the balance.

Fade

The Fade control provides for balance between the front and rear speakers. Press the AUDIO button, select FADE, then press SEEK + or SEEK - to adjust the fade balance.

Tone Control

The Bass and/or Treble controls sound for the desired tone. Press the AUDIO button, select Bass or TREBLE, then press SEEK + or SEEK - to increase or decrease amplification of the band.

To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push-button memory, press the SET button. SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the push-button you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a station is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be locked into push-button memory.

You may add a second station to each push-button by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM stations to be locked into memory. You can recall the stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the push-button twice.

To Change From Clock To Radio Mode

Press the TIME button to change the display between radio frequency and time.

General Information

This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

CD Player Operation

NOTE:

• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position and the volume control ON before the CD player will operate.
• This Radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks and multi-session compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

Inserting The Compact Disc

CAUTION!

This CD player will accept only 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism.

You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF, the display will show the time of day. If you insert a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will show the time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out.

If the power is ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track one.

Seek

Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection.

EJT — Eject

Press the EJT button and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to the radio mode.

If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.

The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF.

FF/TUNE/RW

Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.

RND — Random Play

Press the RND button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.

Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.

Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks. Press the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward feature. If TUNE RW is pressed, the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.

Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.

228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CD/DVD Changer Operation

Press the MODE button to select between the CD player and the optional remote CD/DVD changer.

Time

Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed CD or DVD playing time to time of day.

Notes On Playing MP3 Files

The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

Supported media (disc types)

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.

Supported medium formats (file systems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of directory levels: 15
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

• Level 1: 12 (including a separator "." anda3 character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator "." anda3 character extension)

Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.

Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal

CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs created with an option such as "keep disc open after writing" are most likely multi-session discs. The use of multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times.

Supported MP3 file formats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.

MPEG Specification	Sampling Frequency (kHz)	Bit rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3	48, 44.1, 32	320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3	24, 22.05, 16	160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.

230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Playback of MP3 files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
- Medium formats - Multi-session discs may take longer to load than not multi-session discs
- Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc.

Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play)

SEEK Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)

Pressing the SEEK + button plays the next MP3 File. Pressing the SEEK - button plays the beginning of the MP3 file. Pressing the button within the first ten seconds plays the previous file.

INFO Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)

Press and INFO button while playing MP3 disc. The radio scrolls through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).

Press the INFO button once more to return to "elapsed time" priority mode.

RW/FF (CD Mode For MP3 Play)

Press the FF side of the button to move forward through the MP3 selection. Press the RW side of the button to move back through the MP3 selection.

AM/FM Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)

Switches back to Radio mode.

RND Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)

Pressing this button plays files randomly.

DIR Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)

Press the DIR Button to display folders, when playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure. Press DISC up (button 1) or DISC down (button 5) to move through the folders. Press the SET button to select a folder.

Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If Equipped)

Refer to Hands Free Phone section of the Owner's Manual.

Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If Equipped)

Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner's Manual.

Operating Instructions — MP3 Player, Portable Walkman

An MP3 player can be connected to the audio system. Connect the cables to the RCA jacks located on the front of the CD/DVD changer.

NOTE: Follow the manufactures instructions for the correct colors when connecting the RCA cables. (Refer to the illustration below).

Operating Instructions — Video Games/Camcorders

A video game unit or camcorder can be connected to the rear audio/video system. Connect the cables to the RCA jacks located on the front of the CD/DVD changer.

NOTE: To operate a video game unit a DC to AC adapter may be required, plug the adapter into any power outlet.

Listed below is the standard RCA Jack/Cable connection. You may also want to refer to the manufacture's instructions for the correct colors when connecting the RCA cables.

1. Video in (yellow)
2. Left audio in (white)
3. Right audio in (red)

NOTE: MP3 player's, video game systems, camcorders connected to the RCA jacks and CD's or DVD's inserted into the radio, can be heard through the headphones or the cabin when AUX Mode is selected.

6 DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (RDV) — IF EQUIPPED

The Rear Seat Audio/Video System allows passengers to listen to a CD or DVD from the 6 disc CD/DVD changer through wireless headphones, while the front seat passengers listen to either AM/FM, Cassette or CDs from the radio speakers. A remote control is provided for functions such as changing tracks or DVD functions, as well as selecting discs loaded in the 6 disc CD/DVD changer while listening to the Rear Audio/Video System.

The Rear Seat Audio/Video System may be available in a base and premium version. The premium version includes a six disc changer, remote control and two sets of wireless headphones. The base version includes a single disc player and remote control.

The CD/DVD Changer will play CD-R, CD-RW, CD-Audio and DVD Video disc formats. The video screen will turn on automatically once a DVD is inserted into the changer.

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position before the CD/DVD changer will operate.

Six Disc DVD Changer

811caacd

Operating Instructions — CD/DVD Changer

Loading The CD/DVD Changer

The premium version has a multi-disc changer, and will accept up to six discs. The base version is a single-disc player, and will only accept one disc.

To insert disc(s) into the changer, follow the instructions shown:

1. On vehicles equipped with the premium version, select and press any numbered button without an illuminated light above it.
2. Gently insert the disc with the label facing up while the light below the loading slot is illuminated. On vehicles equipped with the premium version the light above the chosen button will also be flashing, indicating

234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

which numbered position the disc will be loaded into. The disc will automatically be pulled into the CD/DVD changer.

1. Upon insertion, the disc will begin to play, and the light below the loading slot will turn off. On vehicles equipped with the premium version the light above the chosen button will remain illuminated.
2. Repeat the process for loading any additional CD/DVDs into the premium version multi-disc changer. The CD/DVD changer will stop while additional CD/DVDs are loaded.

If the radio volume control is ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD/DVD mode and the video screen will turn on. If the DVD supports the autoplay feature, play will begin automatically in approximately 10 seconds, after the DVD disc menu is displayed. If the DVD does not play automatically, press the ENTER button on the remote control or on the side of the video screen to select play from the menu options. The radio display will show the chapter number and index time in hours and minutes of the DVD, or the track number, minutes and second of the CD.

NOTE:

• You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
• If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF, the DVD will automatically be pulled into the DVD changer and the display will show the time of day.
• It is recommended to label home made burned discs with a permanent marker instead of adhesive labels. These types of labels may become loose and cause the disc to be stuck in the DVD player. This may cause permanent damage to the DVD mechanism.

EJECT (EJT) Button

If there is a disc in the changer, press the EJT button and the disc will eject. If you do not remove the disc within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded and the display will show PAUSE. The radio mode will continue to operate.

To eject additional discs from the premium version multi-disc changer, first select the numbered button where the disc is located and then press the EJT button.

Operating Instructions — Remote Control

NOTE: Aim the remote control at the radio located on the center of the instrument panel and press the desired button. Direct sunlight or objects blocking the line of sight may affect the function of the remote control.

Remote Control
812cd578

236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Remote Control Buttons

1. Headphone Transmitter

2. Menu Up/Next Track/Chapter

3. Menu Left/Fast Rewind

4. Return

5. Setup

6. Pause/Play

7. Mute

8. Display

9. Mode

10. Program Down - Previous Disc

11. Program Up - Next Disc

12. Slow

13. Stop

14. Menu

15. Menu Down/Previous Track/Chapter

16. Menu Right/Fast Forward

Remote Control Buttons
17. Enter
18. Light

Headphone Transmitter Button (1)

The headphone transmitter button on the remote control and the power button on the headphones must be turned ON before sound can be heard from the headphones. On some radios the headphone symbol will flash for approximately 5 seconds in the radio display, indicating the headphones are in use.

ARROW Buttons (2, 3, 15, 16)

These arrow buttons only function in CD/ DVD mode. Use the arrow buttons to toggle through the disc menu screen options.

RTN Button (4)

This button only functions in CD/DVD mode. Press this button to return to the previous menu when in the disc menu mode.

SETUP Button (5)

This button only functions in CD/DVD mode. Press the button after pressing the STOP button to access the set up menu. Use the right and left arrows to move between tabs for language, rating, mark, audio and aspect. Use the up and down arrows to move between options within each tab.

To change an item highlighted in blue, press ENTER. This should cause the highlight to turn yellow. Again, using the up and down arrows will cause the arrow to move up or down. Once the arrow is on the desired selection, press ENTER. When finished, press setup or play to return to playing the CD/DVD or Menu to return to the disc menu.

PAUSE/PLAY Button (6)

This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this button once to pause the video, press a second time to play the video.

MUTE Button (7)

This button mutes audio playing through the DVD player.

DISP Button (8)

This button only functions in DVD video mode. When a DVD video is playing, press this button to display the play menu options.

MODE Button (9)

• With DVD Radio (REV) and DVD changer, this button changes between radio DVD, Radio AUX Jacks and DVD changer input.
• All other radios: No Function.

238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

This button changes between available modes and can be heard in the headphones.

PROG UP/DOWN Buttons (10, 11)

PROG UP selects the next disc loaded in the changer. PROG DOWN selects the previous disc loaded in the changer.

SLOW Button (12)

This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this button to advance the video. If the DVD is paused, pressing this button will advance the video frame by frame.

STOP Button (13)

This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this button to stop the DVD.

MENU Button (14)

This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this button to select the DVD disc menu.

NEXT/PREV Buttons (2, 15)

Press the up arrow or the NEXT button for the next chapter or track on the disc. Press the down arrow or PREV button to return to the beginning of the current chapter or track. Press the down arrow or PREV button twice within two seconds to return to the previous chapter or track. Each press of the NEXT/PREV button up or down will toggle through the chapters or tracks.

FF/RW Buttons (3, 16)

Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) once and the CD/DVD changer will begin to fast forward until the FF button is released. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.

ENTER Button (17)

This button only functions in DVD video mode. Use the ENTER button to enter selections from the menu screens. Use the arrow buttons to toggle through the menu screen options.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239

Light Button (18)

Pressing this button illuminates the buttons on the remote control.

Remote Control Battery Service

- To replace the batteries for the remote control slide the cover rearward.

The replacement batteries for the remote control are two AAA batteries.

Operating Instructions — Video Screen

Push up on the release button to lower the video screen.

Interior view of a car showing the rearview and dashboard with a black arrow pointing to the backrest area (no text or symbols visible)

Lowering Video Screen

240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Video Screen and Controls

1. Screen Width Button

Changes the width of the screen picture.

2. Enter Button

This button will enter the selection from the on-screen menu.

3. Brightness Button

Changes the brightness of the screen picture.

Operating Instructions — Headphones

812cd573

Rear Headphones

1. Power Button
2. Volume Control
3. Power Indicator

Power Button

Pressing the power button will turn the headphones ON/OFF. An indicator light will illuminate on the headphone earpiece to indicate the headphones are ON.

NOTE:

- The headphones will turn OFF automatically in approximately 3 minutes if they lose the signal form the system or when the radio or rear audio/video system is turned OFF.

Volume Control

Rotate the volume control to adjust the volume to the desired listening level.

242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Headphone Battery Service

- Press the button at the bottom of each headphone earpiece and lift the cover upward.

Cross-sectional diagram of a mechanical component with internal channels and a black arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

812cd563

Headphone Battery Service

- Replace the battery in each earpiece and reinstall the cover. The headphones require two AAA batteries.

General Information

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

If you do not hear sound coming from the headphones, check for the following conditions:

1. Rear Seat Audio/Video System and headphones are on. Press the headphone transmitter button (1) on the remote control and the power button on the headphones. An indicator light will illuminate on the headphone earpiece to indicate the headphones are ON.
2. Weak batteries in the headphones.
3. Direct sunlight or objects blocking the line of sight between the headphone transmitter on the video screen and the headphones.

Operating Instructions — Auxiliary Input

• Connect your auxiliary device (video game system, video camera, or MP3 player) cables to the color coded auxiliary jacks on the front of the DVD changer. (Refer to the illustration below).
• Turn your auxiliary device on and adjust its volume to mid or high position.

NOTE: Audio can now be heard through the vehicle's speaker system or through the headphones (if Rear Seat Audio is turned ON).

• Video will be displayed on the screen if connected to a video device.
• Your auxiliary device must be disconnected or turned off to return to DVD changer mode.

NOTE: To operate a video game unit a DC to AC adapter may be required, plug the adapter into any power outlet.

Listed below is the standard RCA Jack/Cable connection. You may also want to refer to the manufacture's instructions for the correct colors when connecting the RCA cables.

1. Video in (yellow)
2. Left audio in (white)
3. Right audio in (red)

244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NAVIGATION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The navigation system provides maps, turn identification, selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes. The buttons to operate the system are located on the instrument panel next to the analog clock.

Refer to your Navigation User's Manual for detailed operating instructions.

The navigation DVD unit is located in the underfloor storage compartment in the rear cargo area. A single disc containing map information for the entire United States and parts of Canada is stored in the DVD unit. Updated DVD's are available from your authorized dealer.

Interior view of a car showing the backrest, intake manifold, and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Navigation DVD Location

To replace the navigation map DVD lift the storage bin cover and liner in the rear cargo area, press the eject button and the disc will eject. Gently insert the new disc into the DVD unit with the label facing up. The disc will automatically be pulled into the DVD unit.

SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED

Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satellite Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, sports, news, entertainment, and talk radio, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.

System Activation

Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of SIRIUS audio service that is included with the factory-installed satellite radio system in your vehicle. You are also invited to call Sirius to set up your free internet account so you can listen to Sirius online. For further information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com. Please have the following information available when changing your subscription:

1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ENS/SID)

The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number can be accessed to retrieve the 12 digit number through each radio. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:

ESN/SID Access With RBB, RAH, REV and RBK Radios

With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF, press the CD "EJT" button and Time buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the twelve-digit ESN/SID number will be displayed. Press the SEEK UP (+) button to display the next four digits. Continue to press the SEEK UP (+) button until all twelve ESN/SID digits have been displayed. The SEEK

246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

DOWN (-) will page down until the first four digits are displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed.

ESN/SID Access With RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1 and RBQ Radios

With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID numbers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed.

Selecting Satellite Mode in RBB, RAH, REV and RBK Radios

Press the MODE button repeatedly until "S A" appears in the display. A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode.

Selecting Satellite Mode in RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1 and RBQ Radios

Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word "SIRIUS" appears in the display. These radios will also display the following:

• After 3 seconds, the current channel name and channel number will be displayed for 5 seconds.
• The current program type and channel number will then be displayed for 5 seconds.
• The current channel number will then be displayed until an action occurs.

A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode.

Selecting a Channel

Press and release the SEEK or TUNE buttons to search for the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until the button is released.

Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before moving on to the next channel. The word "SCAN" will appear in the display between each channel change. Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.

NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-539-7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblocking. Please have your ESN/SID information available.

Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels

In addition to the 10 AM and 10 FM pre-set stations, you may also commit 10 satellite stations to push button memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.

Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (If Equipped)

Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your radio.

PTY Button "SCAN"

When the desired program type is obtained, press the "SCAN" button within five seconds. The radio will play 7 seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next channel of the selected program type. Press the "SCAN" button a second time to stop the search.

248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: Pressing the "SEEK" or "SCAN" button while performing a music type scan will change the channel by one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory button during a music type scan, will call up the memory channel and stop the search.

PTY Button "SEEK"

When the desired program is obtained, press the "SEEK" button within five seconds. The channel will change to the next channel that matches the program type selected.

Satellite Antenna

To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped). Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly on or above the antenna.

Reception Quality

Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons.

• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage.

REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS

The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 o'clock positions.

The right hand rocker switch has a push button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. Pressing the center button changes the operation of the radio from AM to FM to Tape or CD mode depending on which radio is in the vehicle.

The left hand rocker switch has a push button in the center. The function of the left hand switch is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left hand rocker switch operation in each mode:

Radio Operation

Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left hand switch will tune to the next pre-set station that you have programmed in the radio pre-set push-button.

CD Player

Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play.

If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.

The button in the center of the left hand switch has no function in this mode.

250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE

To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the following precautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners, or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high.

Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation.

CLIMATE CONTROLS

The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather.

Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System

81477aba

Manual Heating and A/C Controls

Power Button

When the "POWER" button is pressed the indicator will illuminate and the blower will run at the speed selected by the front blower control. When the button is pressed a

second time the indicator light turns off, the blower will turn off and the system will be positioned in the recirculation mode.

Blower Control

The Blower controls the amount of air delivered to the passenger compartment. There are four blower speeds.

The fan speed increases as you move the control clockwise.

81477abe

252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Dual Zone Temperature Control — If Equipped

With the Dual Zone Temperature Control System, each front seat occupant can independently control the temperature of air coming from the outlets on their side of the vehicle.

8096321c

Dual Zone Temperature Control

This is accomplished by having a separate temperature control lever for both the driver and front seat passenger. The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures.

Mode Control

Simple diagram of a sphere with scattered particles and a small figure, no text or symbols present.

The mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribution.

NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system allows you to operate at intermediate positions between the major modes. These intermediate positions are identified by the small dots.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253

Panel Mode

Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating movement or navigation (no text or symbols present)

Panel Outlets

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vane knob on the center outlets down, will close off the air flow from the center outlets. The thumbwheel next to the outboard outlets can be rotated to regulate or shut off the air flow from these outlets.

254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Bi-Level Mode

Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating movement or change (no text or symbols present)

Bi-Level Outlets

Air comes from both the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets and defrost. A slight amount of air is also directed through the side window demister outlets.

NOTE: In many temperature lever positions, the bi-level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255

Floor Mode

Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating movement or change zones (no text or symbols present)

Floor Outlets Mix Outlets

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

Mix Mode

Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating traffic flow (no text or symbols)

Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable while keeping the windshield clear.

256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Defrost Mode

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Defrost Outlets

Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use this setting when necessary to defrost your windshield and side windows.

NOTE: For improved safety, the compressor is activated and the recirculation mode is deactivated when Mix or Defrost modes are selected. This is done to assist in drying the air and it will help in keeping the windows from fogging.

Manual Air Conditioning Operation

To turn on the air conditioning, set the front blower control to any speed and press the A/C button which is located next to the recirculation

button. An indicator light on the A/C button shows that the air conditioning is on.

NOTE: The indicator light in the "POWER" button must be on for the climate control system to operate.

Cool dehumidified air comes through the outlets selected by the Mode Control. To turn off the air conditioning, press the A/C button a second time. The indicator light will turn off.

NOTE:

• The compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for a few seconds.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the A/C air filter (ATC equipped vehicles only) and the front of the A/C condenser for an accumulation of dirt or insects. The A/C condenser is located in front of the radiator. The A/C air filter is located under the instrument panel on the passenger side.
• Fabric type fascia protectors tend to block the amount of air to the condenser and may reduce air conditioning performance.

Economy Mode

If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn off the indicator light, and the A/C compressor. Move the temperature control lever to the desired temperature.

Recirculation Control

Press the recirculation button to recirculate the air inside the vehicle. This is located next to the A/C button. An indicator light on the button shows that air is being recirculated. Use the recirculation mode to rapidly cool the inside of the vehicle. The recirculation mode can also be used to temporarily block out outside odors, smoke, and dust.

NOTE:

• When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
• In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the Mix and Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected.

258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

- If the recirculation button is pressed while in the Mix or Defrost mode, the indicator light in the recirculation button will flash 3 times indicating that recirculation is not allowed.

A/C Recirculation Programming

The recirculation control is programmed to cancel the recirculation mode when the ignition key is turned OFF and will reset to outside air mode when the ignition key is turned ON. The frequent use of outside air will help keep odors from building up within the air conditioner-heater housing. It is recommended that the recirculation mode be used as little as possible, especially in humid climates.

For hot and dry climates, or people who are allergic to pollen and find frequent use of the recirculation mode necessary, the recirculation mode can be programmed to not automatically reset to the outside mode by using the following procedures:

• Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
• Set the mode control to "PANEL".
• Depress and hold in the "POWER" button.
• Start the engine, and continue to hold in the "POWER" button until the indicator light starts flashing repeatedly.
• Press the recirculation button until the indicator light remains lit.
• The selection will be stored when the ignition switch is turned OFF or if the "POWER" button is pressed.

If the recirculation indicator light is lit, the recirculation mode will not reset when the engine is started. If the recirculation indicator light is not lit, the recirculation mode will reset to the outside air mode when the engine is started. The programmed status can be changed back and forth by following the above mentioned procedure.

Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control

The Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) System automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and front seat passenger. This is accomplished by using two infrared sensors located in the center of the instrument panel. The two infrared sensors independently measure the surface temperature of the driver and front seat passenger. Based on the sensor input, the system automatically adjusts the air temperature, the airflow volume, the airflow distribution, and amount of inside air recirculation to maintain front seat occupant comfort, even under changing outside weather conditions.

80e550c0

Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control

To operate the system, press either the "AUTO HI" or "AUTO LO" buttons. The system now automatically regulates the heating and air conditioning system including blower speed, outlet air temperature, and airflow distribution through the various outlets within the instrument panel. Using the "TEMP" buttons, adjust the

temperature you would like the system to maintain. When the system is set to your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by allowing the system to function automatically. The system will operate fully automatically in either "AUTO HI" or "AUTO LO". The "AUTO LO" setting will limit the maximum fan speed and should be used when more quiet operation is desired. Use the "AUTO HI" setting when the quickest cool-down or warm-up performance is desired.

NOTE:

• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric by selecting the US/M customer programmable feature.

Refer to the "Electronic Vehicle Information Center-Customer Programmable Features" in Section 3 of this manual.

To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain off and "DELAY" will appear in the display until the engine warms up. An estimate of the time remaining until the "DELAY" is complete will appear periodically in the display. However, the fan will engage immediately if the defrost mode is selected or by pushing the blower switch and manually adjusting the fan speed.

This feature may be disabled using the following procedure:

• Press and hold the Heated Rear Window and Auto LO buttons for 5 seconds.
• The "DELAY" symbol will flash to indicate that the feature as been disabled.

This feature may be enabled using the following procedure:

• Press and hold the Heated Rear Window and Auto HI buttons for 5 seconds.
• The "DELAY" symbol will flash to indicate that the feature as been enabled.

Power Button

This button turns the entire system ON/OFF. When the system is turned on it will return to the previous settings.

Dual/Single Zone Operation

When "DUAL" is displayed in the ATC control unit, the driver and passenger air outlet temperatures can be individually adjusted from the two independent "TEMP" buttons. When a front seat passenger is not present, pressing the "DUAL" button will match the passenger's temperature setting to the driver's temperature setting. This will help equalize air outlet temperatures across the left and right side of the instrument panel. The outside temperature will replace the passenger's temperature setting in the display. Pressing the "DUAL" button a second time or adjusting the passenger's "TEMP" button will return the system to dual independent temperature operation.

Manual Operation

This system offers a full complement of manual override features. The indicator light in both the "AUTO HI" or "AUTO LO" buttons will turn off when the system is being used in the manual mode. The fan speed, airflow distribution, and outside air/recirculated air can be manually adjusted.

NOTE: Each of these features operate independently from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually, the remaining features will continue to operate automatically.

262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The front blower control can be set to any fixed blower speed by pressing the rocker switch up or down. This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the auto mode. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected or until either the "AUTO HI" or "AUTO LO" buttons are pressed. The system will continue to automatically adjust air temperature and airflow distribution.

The operator can also select the direction of the air by pressing the mode control rocker switch located to the left of the A/C button and selecting one of the following positions.

Panel Mode

Interior view of a car dashboard with visible engine, seats, and control panel (no text or symbols)

Panel Outlets

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the knob up, down, left, or right will direct the air accordingly. The thumbwheel next to each outlet can be rotated to reduce or shut off the air flow from these outlets.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263

Bi-Level Mode Air comes from both the instrument panel outlets and

Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols)

Bi-Level Outlets

floor outlets. A slight amount of air is also directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

NOTE: In many temperature positions, the bi-level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Floor Mode

Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows and a small figure icon (no text or symbols)

Floor Outlets Mix Outlets

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

Mix Mode

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrows indicating traffic flow (no text or symbols)

Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window demist outlets. This mode is not used when operating in either "AUTO HI" or "AUTO LO". This mode should be used when airflow to the floor and windshield is desired.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265

Defrost Mode

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing steering wheel, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Defrost Outlets

Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use this setting when necessary to defrost your windshield and side windows. If a fog or mist on the windshield or side glass starts to impair visibility, press the front blower button and increase the fan speed to maximum.

NOTE: While operating in "AUTO HI" or "AUTO LO", the system will not automatically sense the presence fog, mist, or ice on the windshield. The defrost button must be pressed to clear the windshield and side glass.

Depress the "A/C" button to turn on and off the air conditioning during manual operation only.

Cool dehumidified air comes through the outlets selected by the Mode Control. To turn off the air conditioning, press the A/C button a second time. The A/C symbol in the display will turn off.

NOTE: If a fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, press the "A/C" button to engage the compressor or press the defrost button. If a fog or mist on the

266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

windshield or side glass starts to impair visibility, press the front blower button and increase the fan speed to maximum.

Recirculation Control

When the outside air contains smoke, odors, high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the recirculation button. The recircu lation mode should only be used temporarily. The recirculate symbol will illuminate in the display when this button is selected. Push the button a second time to allow outside air into the vehicle.

NOTE: In cold weather, use of the recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation mode is not allowed in the Mix and Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected.

A/C Recirculation Programming

The recirculation control is programmed to cancel the recirculation mode when the ignition key is turned OFF and will reset to the outside air mode when the ignition key is turned "ON". The frequent use of outside air will help keep odors from building up within the air conditioner-heater housing. It is recommended that the recirculation mode be used as little as possible, especially in humid climates.

For hot and dry climates, or people who are allergic to pollen and find frequent use of the recirculation mode necessary, the recirculation mode can be programmed to not automatically reset to the outside mode by using the following procedures:

• Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.

• Press and hold the recirculation button.

• While holding the recirculation button, turn the ignition switch to the "RUN" position.

• Continue holding the recirculation button for 4 seconds, then release.

The recirculation control is now programmed so that the recirculation mode will not reset to the outside air mode when the engine is restarted. The recirculation programming can be changed back by repeating this procedure.

Rear Blower Operation

To operate the rear fan, press the "REAR" button. The first time this button is pressed the "REAR AUTO" display will illuminate indicating that the rear fan speed is automatically controlled. To manually control the rear fan speed, press the "REAR" button again and only "REAR" will illuminate in the display. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the rear fan speed using the

switch located in the center console between the second row seats. By pressing the "REAR" button a third time, the rear fan will shut off.

When the ATC display reads "REAR AUTO" or when the rear fan is off, the switch located in the center console between the second row seats is not functional. When the ATC display reads "REAR", only the rear seat occupants can control the rear fan speed from the rear switch. When in the "REAR" mode, the rear occupants can set the rear switch to any fan speed including "OFF", or "AUTO". While in the "AUTO" position, the rear fan speed will be automatically controlled.

Summer Operation

The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene

268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer to section 7, Maintenance Procedures, of this manual for proper coolant selection.

Winter Operation

To insure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Refer to section 7, Maintenance Procedures, of this manual for proper coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging.

Vacation Storage

Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

Window Fogging

Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild rainy or humid weather. To clear the windows, use the A/C button to reduce the humidity inside the vehicle.

Fogging on the inside of the windshield can be quickly removed by pressing the defrost button and increasing the blower speed.

Do not use the Recirculation mode without the A/C button for long periods as fogging may occur.

Outside Air Intake

Before driving, always make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves, ice, or snow, which could reduce airflow and/or plug the water drain tube inside the plenum.

A/C Air Filter — If Equipped

On vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control (ATC), the climate control system filters out dust and pollen from the air. Refer to section 7 "Air Conditioning" for filter replacement instructions.

Outside Temperature Display

The outside temperature can be shown in the ATC display by pressing the "OUTSIDE TEMP" button. After pressing this button, the front seat passenger's temperature setting display will be replaced with the current outside temperature. Press the "OUTSIDE TEMP" button again or press the passenger's "TEMP" button to return the display to the passenger's temperature setting.

Electric Rear Window Defroster

Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated side mirrors. A light in the button will illuminate to indicate the rear window defroster is ON. The defroster automatically turns off after about 10 minutes of operation.

CAUTION!

To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.

Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.

STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

■ Starting Procedures....275

□ Automatic Transmission....276

□ Normal Starting (Above 32°F / 0°C) ..... 276

☐ Extremely Cold Weather Starting (Below -20^ / -29^ )....276

□ High Altitude Starting (Above 4,000 Ft. / 1 2 1 9 m) ..... 2 7 6

□ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 7 7

□ After Starting 278

■ Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ..... 2 7 8

■ Automatic Transmission....278

□ Brake/Transmission Interlock System ..... 2 7 9

□ Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System 280

□ Reset Mode - Electronic Transmission ..... 2 8 0

■ AutoStick 282

□ AutoStick® Operation .....282

□ AutoStick® General Information .....282

■ All Wheel Drive — If Equipped ..... 2 8 4

272 STARTING AND OPERATING

■ Parking Brake....285

■ Brake System 287

□ Anti-Lock Brake System ..... 2 8 8

■ Power Steering....290

■ Driving On Slippery Surfaces ..... 291

□Acceleration....291

□ Traction 292

■ Driving Through Water 292

□ Flowing/Rising Water 292

□ Shallow Standing Water ..... 2 9 3

■ Tire Safety Information....294

□ Tire Markings....294

□ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ..... 2 9 8

□Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 299

■ Tires — General Information ..... 3 0 3

□ Tire Pressure....303

□Tire Inflation Pressures 304

□ Radial-Ply Tires .....306

□ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 3 0 7

□ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 3 0 7

□ Tire Spinning 308

□ Tread Wear Indicators ..... 3 0 9

□ Life Of Tire 309

□ Replacement Tires....3 1 0

□ Alignment And Balance .....311

■ Tire Chains....3 1 2

STARTING AND OPERATING 273

■ Snow Tires....3 1 3
■ Tire Rotation....3 1 3
■ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ..... 3 1 4

□ Basic TPMS Without EVIC — If Equipped . . . . 3 1 7
□ Basic TPMS With EVIC — If Equipped ..... 3 1 9
□ Premium TPMS – If Equipped ..... 3 2 0
□ Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings....3 2 1
□ Service Tire System Soon....3 2 2
□ General Information....3 2 4

■ Fuel Requirements....3 2 5

□3.8L Gasoline Engines....325
□4.0L Gasoline Engines....325

□ Reformulated Gasoline....3 2 6
□ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends....3 2 6
□MMT In Gasoline 327
□ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2 7
□ Fuel System Cautions 3 2 7
□ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .....328

■ Adding Fuel 32

□ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....329
□ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .....330

■ Vehicle Loading....3 3 1

□ Vehicle Certification Label ..... 3 3 1
□ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .....332
□ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)....3 3 2

274 STARTING AND OPERATING

□ Overloading....3 3 2
□ Loading....3 3 3

■ Trailer Towing .... 3 3 4

□ Common Towing Definitions ..... 3 3 4
□ Trailer Hitch Classification....3 3 8
□ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) 3 3 8

□ Trailer And Tongue Weight ..... 3 4 1
□ Towing Requirements....342
□ Towing Tips....347

■ Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) .348

☐ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground) 348

STARTING PROCEDURES

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.

WARNING!

• Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving the gear selection lever or by pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause excessive heat in the exhaust system, resulting in overheating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries.
• NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don't leave the keys in the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death.

276 STARTING AND OPERATING

Automatic Transmission

The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine. Depress the brake pedal before shifting into any driving gear.

Normal Starting (Above 32°F / 0°C)

1. Do not depress the accelerator.
2. Turn and hold the ignition key in the START position and release when engine starts.
3. If engine does not start after 3 seconds, depress the accelerator lightly (while still cranking the engine).
4. If engine does not start after 15 seconds, turn the ignition key off.
5. Wait 10 to 15 seconds, and repeat steps 1 — 5.

NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be depressed to shift out of Park (P).

Extremely Cold Weather Starting (Below -20^/ -29^)

Follow the same instructions in the "Normal Starting" procedure.

To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your dealer) is recommended.

High Altitude Starting (Above 4,000 ft. / 1 219 m)

Follow the same instructions in the "Normal Starting" procedure.

To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your dealer) is recommended.

If Engine Fails To Start

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal Starting" procedure, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.

WARNING!

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. See section 6 of this manual for the proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully.

If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not have enough power to continue running when the key is

278 STARTING AND OPERATING

released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly.

If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor, the "Normal Starting" procedure should be repeated.

After Starting

The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module.

WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could cause electrocution.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles.

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:

• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

WARNING!

It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of "P" or "N" if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

Brake/Transmission Interlock System

This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed. This system is active only while the ignition switch is in the ACCESSORY or ON position. Always depress the brake pedal first, before moving the gear selector out of PARK.

280 STARTING AND OPERATING

Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System

This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ACCESSORY or ON position.

NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.

Reset Mode - Electronic Transmission

For electrical system malfunctions there is an override for the interlock system. In order to override this system the key must be in the ignition with the switch in the ACC or ON positions. Pull up and rearward on the shifter bezel ring.

The override can be activated by pressing the pink-colored tab, which can be accessed through the lower

right corner of the shifter bezel ring. While the override is pressed, the shifter can be moved out of the park position without pressing the brake. After operation return the shifter bezel ring to its original position.

Brake Interlock Override

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, it is recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest

possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.

Gear Ranges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.

"P" Park

Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.

Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range.

WARNING!

Never use Park position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.

"R" Reverse

Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

"N" Neutral

Engine may be started in this range.

"D" Overdrive

To be used for most city and highway driving, it provides smoothest upshifts and downshifts and best fuel economy. When frequent transmission shifting occurs while using the “D” Overdrive position, such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, (i.e. in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick mode and select the “3” range.

NOTE: Using the "3" range in the AutoStick mode while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.

282 STARTING AND OPERATING

AUTOSTICK

AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting capability to provide you with more control. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.

AutoStick® Operation

By placing the selector lever one shift-level below the "D" position, it can be moved from side to side. This allows the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears. Moving the selector lever to the Left (-) triggers a downshift and to the Right (+) an upshift. The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the transaxle range indicator.

NOTE: In Autostick ^® mode, the transaxle will only shift up or down when the driver moves the selector lever to the Right (+) for shifting up or to the Left (-) when shifting down.

AutoStick® General Information

• You can start out in first or second gear. The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.
• If a ratio other than 1st is selected, and the vehicle is brought to a stop, the transaxle control logic will automatically select the 1st gear ratio.
• Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
• Avoid using speed control when Autostick® is engaged.

• The transaxle will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached while Autostick® is engaged.

• Transaxle shifting will be more noticeable when Autostick® is engaged.

• If a low range is selected and the engine accelerates to the rev limit, the transaxle will automatically select the next higher ratio.
• If a downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine. Mostly the transaxle will stay in the manually selected ratio, however.
• If the system detects powertrain overheating, the transaxle will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
• If the system detects a problem, it will disable the AutoStick® mode and the transaxle will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:

• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

WARNING!

It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of "P" or "N" if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

ALL WHEEL DRIVE — IF EQUIPPED

This feature provides full time, on-demand, All Wheel Drive (AWD). The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required. Under normal driving conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction. If the front wheels begin to lose traction,

power is shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the rear wheels.

Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to the rear in a preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch and performance characteristics.

CAUTION!

All wheels must have the same size and type tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.

PARKING BRAKE

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch on, the brake light in the instrument cluster will turn on.

NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the Park position. To release the parking brake, pull out on the parking brake release located on the left side of the instrument panel.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a black arrow pointing to a labeled point (P), no visible text or symbols beyond the label.

Parking Brake Release

When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking brake before placing the gear selector in Park, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of park. As an

286 STARTING AND OPERATING

added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a uphill grade.

The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in Park, a manual transmission in Reverse or first gear. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
• NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don't leave the keys in the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake problems due to excessive heating of the rear brakes.

BRAKE SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for example, repeated brake applications with the engine off), the brakes will still function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You wouldn't have your full braking capacity in an emergency.

BRAKE

If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capability, the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake fluid in the master cylinder drops, the brake warning indicator will light.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance or vehicle stability during braking may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control. You could have an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

288 STARTING AND OPERATING

Anti-Lock Brake System

The Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.

WARNING!

Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.

WARNING!

• Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as possible.

If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).

ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops.

You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti-lock:

• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop),
  • the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
• brake pedal pulsations,

290 STARTING AND OPERATING

- and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.

These are all normal characteristics of ABS.

WARNING!

The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals.

All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer.

POWER STEERING

The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost.

If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.

NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system.

Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible. Damage to the power steering pump may occur.

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

Acceleration

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front (driving) wheels.

WARNING!

Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).

292 STARTING AND OPERATING

Traction

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:

1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

Driving through water more than a few inches deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.

Flowing/Rising Water

WARNING!

Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-ing water can wear away the road or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

Shallow Standing Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following before doing so:

CAUTION!

• Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle's drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle's fluids (i.e. engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e. fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle's engine can cause it to lockup and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.

WARNING!

• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle's traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle's braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle's engine can cause it to lockup and stall out and leave you stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

NOTE:

- P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter "P" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

• European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
• LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters "LT" that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

- Temporary Spare tires are high-pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Tires designed to this standard have the letter "T" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

- High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

296 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Size Designation: P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards"....blank....." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards

LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards T = Temporary Spare tire31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)

215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)

65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)

R = Construction Code—"R" means Radial Construction.—"D" means Diagonal or Bias Construction.

15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)

Service Description:

95 = Load Index—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.

H = Speed Symbol—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions.—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits).

Load Identification:

"....blank....." = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire

Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire

Light Load = Light Load Tire

C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.

Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.

298 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code

located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards, and is approved for highway use.

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)

ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)—03 means the 3rd week.

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)—01 means the year 2001.—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.

Tire Loading and Tire Pressure

Tire Placard Location

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver's door or the driver's side "B" pillar.

Tire Placard Location

Tire and Loading Information Placard

811b5a9a

Tire and Loading Information

This placard tells you important information about the:

1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.

300 STARTING AND OPERATING

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the "Tire and Loading Information" placard and in the "Vehicle Loading" section of this manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR's) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWR's, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the "Vehicle Loading" section of this manual.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 × 150 = 750 , and 1400 - 750 = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392 kg).

302 STARTING AND OPERATING

Occupants			Combined weight ofoccupants and cargofrom Tire Placard	MINUS	Combined Occupant'sweight	=	AVAILABLECargo/Luggage andTrailer TongueWeight
TOTAL	FRONT	REAR
EXAMPLE 1			[ACB4]		Occupant 1: 200 lbsOccupant 2: 130 lbsOccupant 3: 160 lbsOccupant 4: 100 lbsOccupant 5: 80 lbsTOTAL WEIGHT: 670 lbs		(T2Y2)
5	2	3	865 lbs	minus	670 lbs	=	195 lbs
EXAMPLE 2
3	2	1	865 lbs	minus	540 lbs	=	325 lbs
EXAMPLE 3
2	2	0			Occupant 1: 200 lbsOccupant 2: 200 lbsTOTAL WEIGHT: 400 lbs
			865 lbs	minus	400 lbs	=	465 lbs

811a4d11

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

1. Safety—

WARNING!

• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
  • Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

304 STARTING AND OPERATING

2. Economy—

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under inflation, also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.

3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on the face of the driver's door or on the driver's side "B" pillar.

Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the

maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the "Supplemental Tire Pressure Information" section of this manual.

Tire Placard Location

The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to

check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always "cold tire inflation pressure." Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12 °F (7 °C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68 °F (20 °C) and the outside temperature = 32 °F (0 °C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12 °F (7 °C) for this outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

306 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious accident. Don't drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial-Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine them with other types of tires.

Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.

Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.

Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the

308 STARTING AND OPERATING

original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire, replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck.

Refer to "Freeing A Stuck Vehicle" in Section 6 of this manual for additional information.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and don't let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.

Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point.

Life of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to:

• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven

WARNING!

Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on "Tread Wear Indicators"). Refer to the "Tire and Loading Information" placard for the size designation of your tire. The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability.

WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

Alignment And Balance

Poor suspension alignment may result in:

• Fast tire wear.
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided wear.
  • Vehicle pull to right or left.

Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right. Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

312 STARTING AND OPERATING

Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration. Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.

TIRE CHAINS

Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet SAE type "Class S" specifications. Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain manufacturer.

NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions:

• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use.
• Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 12 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 45 mph (70 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• If chains are used on an All Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle, they should be used on all four tires.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer's instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the manufacture.

NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time on dry pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer's instructions on method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for usage.

Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.

SNOW TIRES

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S designation on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).

TIRE ROTATION

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear patterns.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.

314 STARTING AND OPERATING

Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the "Maintenance Schedules" Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

The suggested rotation method is the "forward-cross" shown in the following diagram.

TIRE ROTATION PATTERN

graph LR
    A["Top Left Side"] --> B["Left Side"]
    A --> C["Right Side"]
    D["Bottom Left Side"] --> E["Left Side"]
    D --> F["Right Side"]
    G["Bottom Right Side"] --> H["Left Side"]
    G --> I["Right Side"]

4 TIRE ROTATION

80ba79fe

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure (the placard is located on the drivers side B-pillar).

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile (1 km) after a 3 hour period, and in outside ambient temperature. Refer to the "Tires – General Information" in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle's tires.

The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason, including low temperature effects, or natural air pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS warning lamp to be turned off. The system will automatically update and the TPMS warning lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this information.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than 3 hours) placard of 35 °F (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68 °F ( 20 °C ) and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a temperature drop to 20 °F (-7 °C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Light” will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.

• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, using an accurate tire pressure gage, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS Telltale Lamp.

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.

Basic TPMS without EVIC — If Equipped

The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.

NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and too maintain the proper pressure.

The Basic TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module
  • 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
  • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the manufacturer recommended pressure, located on the tire pressure placard. The system will automatically update and the TPMS warning light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received.

318 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this information.

The TPMS Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The TPMS Telltale Lamp will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.

3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.

NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly that does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, it will not be monitored by the TPMS. In the event that the compact spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire, each ignition key cycle will still show the TPMS Lamp to be ON, and a chime to sound. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically, and the TPMS Lamp will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) for the TPMS to receive this information.

Basic TPMS with EVIC — If Equipped

The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.

NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and too maintain the proper pressure.

The Basic TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module
  • 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various TPMS Messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
  • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp

The TPMS Telltale Lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, EVIC will display the number of tire(s) that are low, followed by the "Tire Low Pressure" text message. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on you vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value. The system will automatically update and the TPMS Lamp will extinguish one the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) for the TPMS to receive this information.

The TPMS Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, EVIC will display a "SERVICE TIRE SYSTEM SOON" text message. If the ignition key is cycled, this

320 STARTING AND OPERATING

sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The TPMS Telltale Lamp will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.

NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly that does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, it will not be monitored by the TPMS. In the event that the compact spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire, each ignition key cycle will still show the TPMS Lamp to be ON, a chime to sound, and a "1 Tire Low Pressure" message to appear in the EVIC. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically, and the TPMS Lamp will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) for the TPMS to receive this information.

Premium TPMS – If Equipped

The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.

NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module
  • 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• 3 Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four wheel wells)
• Various TPMS Messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures.
  • Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The TPMS Telltale Lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low. The EVIC will show a graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing.

Low Tire Pressure Display

322 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Low pressure in the spare or compact tire (which has no sensor and therefore not monitored) will not cause the TPMS Telltale Lamp to illuminate or the chime to sound.

Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value. The system will automatically update, the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and the TPMS Lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) for the TPMS to receive this information.

Service Tire System Soon

The TPMS Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC will display a "SERVICE TIRE SYSTEM SOON" text message for 3 seconds. This text message is then followed by "— —", for the pressure value(s) indicating which TPMS Sensor(s) is not being received.

If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS Telltale Light will no longer

flash, the "SERVICE TIRE SYSTEM SOON" text message will not be present, and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.

324 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

- Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly that does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, it will not be monitored by the TPMS. In the event that compact spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire, each ignition key cycle will still show the TPMS Lamp to be ON, a chime to sound, and the EVIC will still show the low tire pressure value flashing on the graphic display. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically. The TPMS Lamp will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. In addition, the graphic display in the EVIC will update with a new pressure value. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) for the TPMS to receive this information.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
- This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses:

United States....K R 5 S 1 2 0 1 2 3

Canada 2671-S120123

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

3.8L GASOLINE ENGINES

The 3.8L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use of premium gasoline is not recom-

mended. Under normal conditions, the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular gasolines, and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance.

4.0L GASOLINE ENGINES

The 4.0L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended. Under normal conditions, the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular and mid-grade gaso-lines, and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.

326 STARTING AND OPERATING

Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, engine performance, and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as "Reformulated Gasoline".

Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle.

CAUTION!

DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components.

Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Methanol.

MMT In Gasoline

MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his/her gasoline contains MMT.

It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States.

MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines.

Materials Added to Fuel

All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives are not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel.

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle's performance:

- The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance, damage the emission control system.

• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:

- Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

ADDING FUEL

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

As a reminder, a fuel icon with an arrow indicating which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located on, is located in the instrument cluster, just below the Fuel Gage.

The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.

CAUTION!

Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on due to fuel vapors escaping from the system.

CAUTION!

To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not "top off" the fuel tank after filling.

NOTE: When the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on.
• Failure to follow the above may result in serious injury or even death.

NOTE:

- Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a "clicking" sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened.

- If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the Malfunction Indicator Light may come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.

WARNING!

A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

- If the gASCAP message is displayed in the instrument cluster, this signifies a leak or change in the evaporative system is detected. Sometimes this is the result of a loosely fitting (or possibly damaged) filler cap.

Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn the gASCAP message off.

• Make sure that the fuel filler cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
• If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized dealer service center as soon as possible. See Section 7 of this manual for more information.

VEHICLE LOADING

The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown in the charts that follow. This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated.

If the seatbacks are folded for carrying cargo, do not exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR.

Vehicle Certification Label

Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear of the driver's door.

The label contains the following information:

• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
- Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)

The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

332 STARTING AND OPERATING

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.

WARNING!

Because the front wheels drive and steer the vehicle, it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident.

Overloading

The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front and rear GAWR.

The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it is not over the GVWR.

Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately. It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles.

Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.

Loading

To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.

A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note that neither the GVWR or the GAWR capacities have been exceeded.

GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING (GVWR) 2630 KG (5800 LBS) (Example Only)

Side profile illustration of a car with two triangular supports at the base (no text or symbols)

8105b265

334 STARTING AND OPERATING

Example Only Front Axle	Rear Axle
Empty Weight 2538 lbs	(1151 kg)	2076 lbs (942 kg)
Load (Including driver, passengers and cargo)	223 lbs (101 kg)	890 lbs (404 kg)
Total	2762 lbs (1253 kg)	2968 lbs (1346 kg)
GAWR 2826 lbs	(1282 kg)	3035 lbs (1377 kg)

TRAILER TOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.

To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

Common Towing Definitions

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)

The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings include a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a driver).

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.

WARNING!

It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident.

Tongue Weight (TW)

The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.

Frontal Area

The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer.

Trailer Sway Control

The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.

336 STARTING AND OPERATING

Weight-Carrying Hitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they're commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized trailers.

Weight-Distributing Hitch

A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturers' directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load

equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration / loading to comply with gross axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.

WARNING!

An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in an accident.

Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.

EXAMPLE ONLY

Side view illustration of a pickup truck pulling a two-wheeled trailer (no text or symbols)

FIG. 1 WITHOUT WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION (INCORRECT)

Side-view illustration of a pickup truck and a two-wheeled campfire vehicle (no text or symbols)

FIG 2. WITH WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION (CORRECT) 8181f965

EXAMPLE ONLY

Side profile illustration of a pickup truck with a trailer being transported (no text or symbols)

FIG. 3 IMPROPER ADJUSTMENT (INCORRECT)

8181f96f

Weight Distributing Hitch System Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System

338 STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer Hitch Classification

Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your dealer for package content.

The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your given drivetrain.

Trailer Hitch Classification
Class Max. GTW(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty	3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty	10,000 lbs (4540 kg)

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.

3.8L & 4.0L Automatic with Engine Oil Cooler
Engine/Transmission	GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)	Frontal Area	Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)	Max. Tongue Wt.
3.8L & 4.0L Automatic with Engine Oil Cooler	8,600 lbs (3 900 kg) 40	SQ. FT.	Up to 2 persons & Luggage 3,500 lbs (1 600 kg)	350 lbs (158 kg)
	8,600 lbs (3 900 kg) 40	SQ. FT.	3 to 4 persons & Luggage 3,000 lbs (1 360 kg)	300 lbs (136 kg)
	8,600 lbs (3 900 kg) 40	SQ. FT.	5 to 6 persons & Luggage 1,000 lbs (454 kg)	100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire-Safety Information Section in this manual.

340 STARTING AND OPERATING

3.8L & 4.0L Automatic WITHOUT Engine Oil Cooler
Engine/Transmission	GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)	Frontal Area	Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)	Max. Tongue Wt.
3.8L & 4.0L Automatic WITHOUT Engine Oil Cooler	7,700 lbs (3 492 kg) 40	SQ. FT.	Up to 2 persons & Luggage 2,600 lbs (1 179 kg)	260 lbs (117 kg)
	7,700 lbs (3 492 kg) 40	SQ. FT.	3 to 4 persons & Luggage 2,100 lbs (952 kg)	210 lbs (95 kg)
	N/A N/A		5 to 6 persons & Luggage NOT Recommended	N/A
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE: Your vehicle must be equipped with a trailer tow package (trailer hitch and engine oil cooler) in order to tow a gross trailer weight of 3,500 lbs (1 600 kg).

Trailer and Tongue Weight

Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents.

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.

Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

• The tongue weight of the trailer.
- The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

342 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options, must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.

Towing Requirements

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:

CAUTION!

• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your vehicle.
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).

Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.

WARNING!

Improper towing can lead to an injury accident. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible:

Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident.

- When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.

• Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P for Park. Always, block or "chock" the trailer wheels.

• GCWR must not be exceeded.

- Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded:

1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR

344 STARTING AND OPERATING

1. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight).

Towing Requirements — Tires

• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the Tires–General Information section of this manual on Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires-General Information section of this manual on Tread Wear Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.

- When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Information section of this manual on Replacement Tires for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes

• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.

- Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

WARNING!

Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident.

Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety.

346 STARTING AND OPERATING

The Trailer Tow Package may includea4and7pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.

NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness.

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations.

graph LR
    A["RIGHT STOP/TURN"] --> B["○"]
    C["LEFT STOP/TURN"] --> D["○"]
    E["PARK"] --> F["○"]
    G["GND"] --> H["○"]
    I["FEMALE PINS"] --> J["Male PIN"]
    style I fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

4 - Pin Connector

7- Pin Connector

Towing Tips

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic.

Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission

The "D" range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the "3" range should be selected.

NOTE: Using the "3" range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide better engine braking.

The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation. See Maintaining Your Vehicle in Section 7 Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change information and intervals.

NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing.

348 STARTING AND OPERATING

Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If Equipped)

• Don't use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.

Towing Tips — Cooling System

To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:

- City Driving

When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission in neutral but do not increase engine idle speed.

- Highway Driving

Reduce speed.

- Air Conditioning

Turn off temporarily.

– refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more information.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground)

Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended.

NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

■ Hazard Warning Flasher .... 3 5 0

■ If Your Engine Overheats ..... 3 5 1

■ Jacking And Tire Changing....3 5 2

□ Jack Location....352
□ Spare Tire Stowage....3 5 4
□ Preparations For Jacking....3 5 5
□ Jacking Instructions....3 5 6

■ Jump-Starting Procedure....360

■ Freeing A Stuck Vehicle....362
■ Towing A Disabled Vehicle .....363

□ With Ignition Key 363

□ Without The Ignition Key .....365

☐ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground) 365

□ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly 365

350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

Interior view of a car dashboard with air condition meters and a directional arrow pointing to the top section (no text or symbols visible)

Hazard Flasher Switch

The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel above the center air outlets.

To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers, depress the switch on the instrument panel. When the Hazard Warning Switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the flashers.

CAUTION!

This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is OFF.

NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may wear down your battery.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.

• On the highways — Slow down.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put transmission in neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and

the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads "H", pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the "H", turn the engine off immediately, and call for service.

352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see Section 7, Maintenance, of this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

Jack Location

Five Passenger Seating

The jack and jack-handle are stowed in the rear storage bin located behind the second row bench seat. Pull up on the storage bin cover to access the jack and jack tools.

Interior view of a vehicle showing a car with a gear shift and a tool, no visible text or symbols

Jack Location

Remove the scissors jack and jack handle by rotating the small wing nut to the left.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a black arrow pointing to a specific part, no visible text or symbols.

Jack Wing Nut

Six Passenger Seating

The jack and jack-handle are stowed in the rear storage bin located in the rear cargo floor. Pull up on the storage bin cover and liner to access the jack and jack tools.

Top-down view of a car's front grille and dashboard area, showing no text or symbols

Jack Location

354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Spare Tire Stowage

Five Passenger Seating

The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow the spare, use the jack handle to rotate the "spare tire drive" nut. The nut is located under the plastic cover at the center rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the liftgate opening.

Six Passenger Seating

The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow the spare, use the jack handle to rotate the "spare tire drive" nut. The nut is located under the trim cover at the center of the rear storage bin in the rear cargo floor.

Interior view of a car showing the backrest and side panel with a triangular mesh structure (no text or symbols visible)

Lowering Spare Tire

Spare Tire Removal

Fit the jack-handle over the drive nut. Rotate the nut to the left until the spare is on the ground with enough slack cable to allow you to pull the tire out from under the vehicle.

CAUTION!

The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack handle only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.

When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel.

Preparations For Jacking

Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the gear selector in PARK. Turn OFF the ignition.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.

- Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.

- Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.

- Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.

Jacking Instructions

WARNING!

• Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking.
• Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic.

• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the value stem facing the ground.

• Remove the spare wheel, scissors jack and jack-handle from stowage.

• Carefully pry off the wheel center cap if equipped, using the tip of the jack handle.
• Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.

NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.

1. There are two jack engagement locations on each side of the body — refer to the following illustration.

Side view of a car with two circular insets showing mechanical components (no text or symbols)

Jack Engagement Locations

1. These locations are on the sill flange on the underside of the body. The jack is to be located, engaging the flanges, 20 cm (8 inches) inward from the edge of the wheel opening closest to the wheel to be changed. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the right until the jack head is properly engaged in the described

358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

location. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged. Never jack up the vehicle using any suspension components.

1. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right, using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.

1. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
2. Install the spare wheel, for vehicles with wheel covers, align the notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover on the wheel by hand only and install the wheel lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered.

NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the compact spare.

Do not use a hammer or force to install the wheel covers.

1. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
2. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate

lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. Correct wheel nut tightness is 130 N·m (95 ft. lbs). If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station.

1. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided.

NOTE: The full size flat tire will not store under the vehicle. It should be repaired /or replaced, and reinstalled on the vehicle as soon as possible.

1. Secure the spare tire as follows:

2. Turn the wheel so that the valve-stem is down. Slide the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and position it properly across the wheel opening.

3. For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow with the valve-stem toward the rear of the vehicle.
4. Using the jack-handle, rotate the drive nut to the right until the wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.

5. Continue to rotate the nut until you hear the mechanism click three times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the tire several times to be sure it is securely in place.

6. Stow the jack and jack handle.

7. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct pressure as required.

NOTE: When reinstalling the wheel center cap, insure that the valve stem symbol on the back of the cap is pointed toward the wheel valve stem. Install the center cap using hand pressure only. Do not use a hammer.

Wheel Nuts

All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is especially important during the first few hundred miles of operation, and after each time a tire is changed, to allow the wheel nuts to become properly set. All nuts should first be firmly seated against the wheel. The nuts should then be tightened to recommended torque. Tighten the nuts to final torque in increments. Progress around the bolt circle, tightening the nut opposite to the nut just previously tightened until final torque is achieved. Recommended torque is 130 N·m (95 ft. lbs).

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don't lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water.
• A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts.
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.

When jump starting, proceed as follows:

1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach and without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake, place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the ignition switch to the OFF position for both vehicles.
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical loads.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery. Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery.

WARNING!

Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.

1. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have a good contact on the engine.

WARNING!

Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode.

During cold weather when temperatures are below freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode. The battery temperature must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump start.

1. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.

WARNING!

Any procedure other than above could result in:

1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent;
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion;
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse

and Drive. Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And don't let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

CAUTION!

Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

With Ignition Key

Front Wheel Drive

Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions: The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the distance to be traveled must not exceed 100 miles (160 km), the towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72 km/h), and both front and rear wheels must be on the ground. Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transmission geartrain failure. If the transmission is not

364 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 100 miles (160 km), the vehicle must be towed with the front wheels off the ground.

All Wheel Drive

Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions: The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the distance to be traveled must not exceed 100 miles (160 km), the towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72 km/h), and both front and rear wheels must be on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed farther or at a higher rate of speed, it must be transported on a flat bed truck.

All Transmissions

CAUTION!

• Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the front fascia will result.
• Always use wheel lift equipment when towing from the front. The only other approved method of towing is with a flat bed truck.
• Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to the rear sheet metal, liftgate and fascia will occur.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.

If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed (wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON position, not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the transmission remains in NEUTRAL.

Without The Ignition Key

Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only approved method of towing with out the ignition key is with a flat bed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground)

Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, is only permitted within the limitations described in this section.

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLY

The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow an All-Wheel Drive (AWD) or front wheel drive vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

□ Power Steering — Fluid Check .....385

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

□ Front & Rear Suspension Ball Joints ..... 3 8 5
□ Steering Shaft Seal 385
□ Steering Linkage....386
□ Drive Shaft Universal Joints ..... 3 8 6
□ Body Lubrication....386
□ Windshield Wiper Blades ..... 3 8 7
□ Windshield And Rear Window Washers ..... 3 8 7
□ Exhaust System....388
□ Cooling System....389
□ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses ..... 3 9 4
□ Brakes....394
☐ Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check ..396
□ Fuel System Hoses 397

□ Automatic Transmission....398
□ All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped ..... 4 0 0
□ Front And Rear Wheel Bearings .....401
□ Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion 401
□ Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders . . . 406

■ Fuses (Integrated Power Module) ..... 4 0 7
■ Vehicle Storage....4 1 0
■ Replacement Light Bulbs .....411
■ Bulb Replacement....4 1 2
□ Headlights 412
□ High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID) — If Equipped 4 1 3

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369

□ Front Park/Turn Signal And Sidemarker Lights 413
□ Front Fog Light 4 1 4
□ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker And Back-Up Lights 4 1 5
□ License Light....4 1 5

■ Fluids And Capacities ..... 4 1 6
■ Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ..... 4 1 7

□Engine 417
□ Chassis 418

370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

3.8L ENGINES

Engine Compartment 3.8L Engines

4.0L ENGINES

Engine Compartment 4.0L Engine

372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the "Malfunction Indicator Light." It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• Prolonged driving with the "Malfunction Indicator Light" on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
• If the "Malfunction Indicator Light" is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

Should the "Loose Fuel Filler Cap" or "gASCAP" message appear, there may be a problem in the evaporative system. Before taking the vehicle into a qualified Dealership Service center, check first to see if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. A loose fuel filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off. Take your vehicle in to a qualified Dealership Service center.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states, which have an I/M (Inspection and Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Light) is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery replacement. If the OBD system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:

a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the

ignition key or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.

b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD system is ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation, you should have your

vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Use of genuine Mopar® parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-Mopar® parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer's warranty.

DEALER SERVICE

Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.

Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals, there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance. However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance. These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected.

Engine Oil

Checking Oil Level

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.

The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines.

Engine Oil Dipstick

CAUTION!

Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377

Change Engine Oil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to "Maintenance Schedule" in Section 8 of this manual for information on this system.

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months, whichever occurs first.

Engine Oil Selection

For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol

This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 4.0 Liter Engines

SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred for all operating temperatures. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.

Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.8 Liter Engines

SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.

For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to the Engine Compartment illustration in this section.

Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

Synthetic Engine Oils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed.

Materials Added to Engine Oil

The manufacture strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and it's performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.

Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

This manufacture's engines have a full-flow type oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended.

Drive Belt

At the mileage indicated in section 8: "Maintenance Schedule", replace the drive belt with a new drive belt.

NOTE: The belt must be routed correctly to ensure proper drive function.

Spark Plugs

Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine performance and emission control. New plugs should be installed at the specified mileage. The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark

380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

plug. Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the catalytic converter. For proper type of replacement spark plugs, refer to the "Vehicle Emission Control Information" label in the engine compartment.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this manual for engine air cleaner filter maintenance intervals.

NOTE: Be sure to follow the "dusty or off-road conditions" maintenance interval if applicable.

WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.

Catalytic Converter

The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.

CAUTION!

Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should be obtained immediately.

382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.

Maintenance-Free Battery

The top of the MAINTENANCE-FREE battery is permanently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

WARNING!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Don't allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don't lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Don't use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts. Don't allow cable clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a "fast charger" is used while battery is in vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a "fast charger" to provide starting voltage.

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a system performance check. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.

WARNING!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, or Refrigerants.

A/C Air Filter

The filter access door is located under the instrument panel on the passenger side. To replace the filter slide the lock toward the rear of the vehicle (unlock position). Remove the access door and pull the filter downward. When installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation. Align the black arrow on the bottom of the filter frame with the direction of airflow (away from the blower motor and towards the center of the car).

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" section of this manual for the recommended air conditioning filter replacement intervals.

Power Steering — Fluid Check

Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership."

WARNING!

Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid.

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.

Front & Rear Suspension Ball Joints

The suspension ball joints are permanently sealed. No regular maintenance is required for these components.

Steering Shaft Seal

The steering shaft seal, at the point where the shaft passes through the bulkhead, is lubricated when it is installed. If the seal becomes noisy when the steering shaft is turned, it should be lubricated with a multi-purpose grease.

Mopar multi-purpose lubricant is recommended.

386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Steering Linkage

The tie rod end ball joints are permanently lubricated and do not require periodic maintenance.

Drive Shaft Universal Joints

Your vehicle has constant velocity universal joints. Periodic lubrication of these joints is not required. However, the joint boots should be inspected for external leakage or damage when other maintenance is performed. If leakage or damage is evident, the universal joint boot and grease should be replaced immediately.

Continued operation could result in failure of the universal joint due to water and dirt contamination of the grease. This would require complete replacement of the joint assembly.

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, doors, liftgate and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar ^® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper Blades

The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

Windshield and Rear Window Washers

The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared. It is located in the engine compartment and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield

washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.

The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.

Interior view of a vehicle's engine bay with visible wiring and control buttons (no text or symbols)

Washer Fluid Reservoir

388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Exhaust System

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to "Exhaust Gas" in the Safety Tips section of this manual.

Cooling System

WARNING!

• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, don't open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.

Engine Coolant Checks

Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.

Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (but not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to

390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill

At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled.

If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old antifreeze solution.

Selection Of Engine Coolant

Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct coolant type.

CAUTION!

Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT engine coolants, may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, it should be replaced with the specified coolant as soon as possible.

Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.

This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not recommended.

Adding Engine Coolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant.

When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% recommended Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year / 100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology), or equivalent, in water should be used. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34^ ( -37^ ) are anticipated.

Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.

The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.

Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.

NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes.

Cooling System Pressure Cap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

• The warning words "DO NOT OPEN HOT" on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add coolant when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.

Disposal of Used Engine Coolant

Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your

community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.

Engine Coolant Level

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine off and cold, the coolant level in the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.

When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

Points To Remember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

- Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.

• Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean, also.

394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

- Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses

Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots, brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.

Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any heat source or moving component which may cause heat damage or mechanical wear.

Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed.

Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present.

Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.

Brakes

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Suggested service intervals can be found in the Maintenance Schedules.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You wouldn't have your full braking capacity in an emergency.

Brake And Power Steering Hoses

When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance, inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.

Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed.

Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present.

NOTE: Often, fluid such as oil, power steering fluid, and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings. Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure (during vehicle operation), should be noted before a hose is replaced based on leakage.

NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be performed whenever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil change. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing, or worn spots. If there is any evidence of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, the hose

396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

should be replaced immediately! Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure.

WARNING!

Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure. You could have an accident. If you see any signs of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake hoses replaced immediately.

Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check

The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing underhood services, or immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system failure.

Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the "FULL" mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.

Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system.

Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.

Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid, refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.

WARNING!

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire.
- Use of brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or unidentified as to specification, may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking. You could have an accident.

Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture.

CAUTION!

Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid, all brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure.

Fuel System Hoses

Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are designed with hoses and quick connect fittings which have unique material characteristics to provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline.

You are urged to use only the manufacture specified hoses with quick connect fittings, or their equivalent in material and specification, in any fuel system servicing. It is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick connect fittings that have been removed during service.

398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Care should be taken in installing quick connect fittings to insure they are properly installed and fully connected. See your authorized dealer for service.

Automatic Transmission

The automatic transmission and differential assembly are contained within a single housing.

All automatic transmissions are equipped with a conventional filler tube and dipstick. If fluid is added, it should be added through the dipstick hole in the case.

The dipstick is located just behind the radiator, lower right side.

Selection of Lubricant

It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only manufacturers recommended transmission fluid, refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts

for correct fluid type. It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid.

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.

4 SPEED DIPSTICK

Procedure For Checking Fluid Level

The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and of the fluid.

To properly check the automatic transmission fluid level, the following procedure must be used:

1. The vehicle must be on level ground.
2. The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60 seconds.

3. Fully apply parking brake.

4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in P (PARK). Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of dirt entering the transmission.

5. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or warm. Hot fluid is approximately 180^ F ( 82^ C), which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle has been driven at least 15 miles (24 km). The fluid cannot be comfortably held between the finger tips. Cold is when the fluid is below 80^ F ( 27^ C).
6. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated. Remove dipstick and note reading.

a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the crosshatched area marked "HOT" (between the upper two holes in the dipstick).

b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between the lower two holes in the area marked "COLD".

400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

If the fluid level indicates low, add sufficient fluid to bring to the proper level.

CAUTION!

Do not overfill. Dirt and water in the transmission can cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is reseated properly.

Fluid and Filter Changes

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" in Section 8 of this manual for the recommended transaxle fluid and filter change intervals.

If the transaxle is disassembled for any reason, the fluid and filter should be changed.

NOTE: Refer to Section 8 of this manual for Maintenance Schedules.

If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the fluid and filter should be changed.

Special Additives

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid

All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped

Under normal operating conditions, periodic fluid level checks and lubricant changes for the Power Transfer Unit and Rear Carrier, are not required. However when the vehicle is serviced for other reasons, the exterior surface of these components should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks. Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.

Power Transfer Unit

The fill plug is located on the side of the power transfer unit housing. The fluid should be maintained at a level even with the bottom of the fill plug hole when the vehicle is parked on a level surface. If it becomes necessary to add or replace the fluid, use only the manufacturers recommended fluid, refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.

Rear Carrier

The fill plug is located on the side of the rear carrier housing. The fluid should be maintained at a level even with the bottom of the fill plug hole when the vehicle is parked on a level surface. if it becomes necessary to add or replace the fluid, use only the manufacturers recommended fluid, refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.

Fluid Changes

Refer to Section 8 of this manual for Maintenance Schedules for fluid change intervals.

Front And Rear Wheel Bearings

Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed. No regular maintenance is required for these components.

Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion

Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme

402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-body protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.

What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
  • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

CAUTION!

Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch metal and painted surfaces.

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.

Wheel and Wheel Trim Care

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove

404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use Mopar® Wheel Cleaner (05066247AB) or equivalent or select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only Mopar® or equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels' protective finish.

Interior Care

Cleaning Interior Trim

Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth, a damp cloth with Mopar Total Clean, then Mopar Spot & Stain Remover if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

Cleaning Leather Upholstery

Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

YES Essentials® Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If Equipped

YES Essentials ^® seats may be cleaned in the following manner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply Mopar® Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply Mopar® Multi-Purpose Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essentials® products.

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders

Removal

Grab the center of the rubber portion of the cupholder and lift upward.

Cleaning

Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for approximately one hour. After one hour pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water about six times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth.

Installation

Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly.

FUSES (INTEGRATED POWER MODULE)

Interior view of a vehicle's dashboard and engine compartment showing wiring, sensors, and control panel (no readable text or symbols)

Integrated Power Module (IPM)

An Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains maxi fuses, mini fuses and relays. A label that identifies each component is printed on the inside of the cover.

Cavity Cartridge Fuse		Description
1 40 Amp	Green	Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Pump
2 Spare
3 30 Amp	Pink	Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
4 40 Amp	Green	Body Control Module (BCM) Feed 1
5 40 Amp	Green	Electronic Back Light (EBL)
6 30 Amp	Pink	Front Wipers
7 40 Amp	Green	Starter
8 40 Amp	Green	Power Seat C/B

408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse		Description
9 40 Amp	Green	Power Sunroof
10 Spare
11 40 Amp	Green	Headlight Washer, Power Liftgate
12 Spare
13 40 Amp	Green	Radiator Fan 1
14 Spare
15 40 Amp	Green	Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module
40 40 Amp	Green	Driver Door Node
41 40 Amp	Green	Passenger Door Node

Cavity Cartridge Fuse	Description
42 40 Amp Green	Front Blower

Cavity Mini Fuse Description
24 20 Amp	Yel-low	Power Outlet (Selectable)
25 15 Amp	Blue Radio, Am	mplifier, Navigation, Hands-Free Phone (HFM), Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), EC, SNRF, Mirror
26 20 Amp	Yel-low	Power Outlet
27 Spare
28 25 Amp	Natural	Horn
Cavity M	Mini Fuse Descrip	ption
29 20 Amp	Yel-low	Cluster, CHMSL, Stop Lights, Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
30 10 Amp	Red Ignition Switch
31 20 Amp	Yel-low	Hazard
34 Spare
35 Spare
36 20 Amp	Yel-low	Electronic Automatic Transaxle (EATX) Solenoid
37 25 Amp	Natural	ASD
38 20 Amp	Yel-low	Fuel Pump
39 20 Amp	Yel-low	A/C Clutch, MTV

Cavity Mini Fuse Description
44 25 Amp	Natural	Rear Heated Seats
45 10 Amp	Red Anti-Lock	Brake System (ABS) Ignition Run
46 20 Amp	Yellow	Passenger Door
47 20 Amp	Yellow	Driver Door
48 15 Amp	Blue PLG, OHC	Body Control Module (BCM), Navigation, Hands-Free Phone (HFM)
49 25 Amp	Natural	Amplifier
50 15 Amp	Blue HVAC, DVD, RAD, CLK, SKREEM

CAUTION!

• When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

VEHICLE STORAGE

If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery. You may:

• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS

LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb Number

Center & Rear Reading Lights....578

Front Door Courtesy Light 578

Liftgate Light(s). 578

Overhead Console Reading Lights....212-2

Visor Vanity Lights. V 2 6 3 7

NOTE: For lighted switches, see your dealer for replacement instructions.

All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement.

LIGHT BULBS — Exterior Bulb Number

Back-up 921

Rear Stop, Turn Signal 3157

Rear Sidemarker. 194NA

Fog Light....9145

Front Turn Signal 3457 NAK

Front Sidemarker 194NA

Standard Headlight H 1 3

License. 168

412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

BULB REPLACEMENT

Headlights

1. Open hood, disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.

Interior view of a car dashboard with visible engine, dashboard, and air vent (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the two screws securing the headlight module to the vehicle and gently pull the headlight module forward away from the vehicle, disengaging the assembly from the lower attachment clip.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the rubber boot seal.
4. Rotate the bulb to the left and replace the bulb. Reinstall the rubber boot seal and then the headlight module.

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID) — If Equipped

The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlight switch off and the key removed. Because of this, you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb yourself. If a headlight bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.

WARNING!

A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlights when the headlight switch is turned ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.

NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID), when the headlights are turned

on there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.

Front Park/Turn Signal and Sidemarker Lights

1. Open hood, disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.

Interior view of a car with visible engine, dashboard, and storage compartments (no text or symbols)

80f67f3e

414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Remove the two screws securing the headlight module to the vehicle and pull the headlight module forward away from the vehicle, disengaging the assembly from the lower attachment clip.
2. Twist the bulb socket to remove from the headlight module and pull the bulb from socket.
3. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket and then reinstall the headlight module.

Front Fog Light

1. Reach under the front fascia and grasp the front fog light bulb.
2. Twist the front fog light bulb to remove from the fog light module.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb.

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker and Back-up Lights

1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two tail light assembly screws and rotate the assembly outward to remove the ball stud form the attaching grommet.

Close-up of a car interior showing a door, seat, and connector (no visible text or symbols)

1. Twist the socket assembly to remove it from the housing.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the tail light assembly.

License Light

1. Place a screwdriver in the slot next to the release tab and push on the release tab to remove the lens.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Replace the bulb and push on the lens until it snaps into place.

416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

	U.S. Metric
Fuel All Engines 23 gallons 87 liters
Engine Oil-With Filter
4.0 Liter Engines (SAE 10W-30, API Certified) 5.5 qts 5.2 liters
3.8 Liter Engines (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 5.0 qts 4.7 liters
Cooling System *
4.0 Liter Engines (Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)	10.7 qts 10.1	liters
3.8 Liter Engines (Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)	11.8 qts 11.2	liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Component Fluids, Lubricants and	Genuine Parts
Engine Coolant	Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
3.8 Liter Engine Oil Use API Certified	SAE 5W-20 engine oil. Refer to your oil filler cap for correct SAE grade, meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
4.0 Liter Engine Oil Use API Certified	SAE 10W-30 engine oil, refer to oil viscosity chart for correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Oil Filter, 3.8L & 4.0L Engines	Mopar® 5281090 or equivalent. Refer to your oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Spark Plugs 3.8L & 4.0L Engines ZFR5LP-13G (Gap.050 in / 1.27 mm
Fuel Selection 3.8L 87 Octane
Fuel Selection 4.0L 89 Octane

418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Chassis

Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Automatic Transmission Mopar® ATF	+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
AWD Power Transfer Unit Mopar® Gear	Lubricant 75W-90 or equivalent.
AWD Rear Carrier Mopar® Gear Lubricant	75W-90 or equivalent.
Brake Master Cylinder Mopar® DOT 3	and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir	Mopar®Power Steering Fluid +4 or Mopar® ATF +4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS

■ Emission Control System Maintenance ..... 4 2 0

□ Required Maintenance Intervals ..... 4 2 3

■ Maintenance Schedule 4 2 0

420 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

The "Scheduled" maintenance services, listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system. These, and all other maintenance services included in this manual, should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving.

Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected.

NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part, which has been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles “Change Oil” will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate, this means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

NOTE:

• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichever comes first.

Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If this scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under "Oil Change Required" in "Use Factory Settings" of the EVIC section in this manual or under "Odometer/Trip Odometer" in the "Instrument Cluster Descriptions section of this manual.

At Each Stop for Fuel

• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required.

Once a Month

• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required.

422 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, power steering and transmission and add as needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation.

At Each Oil Change

• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.

CAUTION!

Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle.

Required Maintenance Intervals

Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months	Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. 6,000 10 000 6
Rotate Tires. 6,000 10 000 6
If using your vehicle for dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.	12,000 20 000	12
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. 12,000 20 000 12
Replace the air conditioning filter. 12,000 20 000 12
Inspect the CV Joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months.	24,000 40 000	24
Inspect Exhaust System. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months.	24,000 40 000	24
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.	24,000 40 000	24
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. 30,000 50 000 30

424 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months	Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Change Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) fluid. 60,000 100 000 60
Change Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid. 60,000 100 000 60
Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.	60,000 100 000 60
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. 90,000 150 000 90
Flush and replace the engine coolant. 102,000 170 000 60
Replace the ignition cables on 3.3L and 3.8L engines. 102,000 170 000 102
Replace the spark plugs on 3.8L, 4.0L engines. 102,000 170 000 102
Replace the timing belt on 4.0L engine. 102,000 170 000 102
Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter.	120,000 200 000 120
Replace Accessory Drive Belt(s).	120,000 200 000 120

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

■ Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle....428

□ Prepare For The Appointment ..... 4 2 8

□ Prepare A List....4 2 8

□ Be Reasonable With Requests ..... 4 2 8

■ If You Need Assistance....428

■ Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) ..... 4 3 1

■ Mopar® Parts....4 3 1

■ Reporting Safety Defects ..... 431 □ In Canada ..... 4 3 2

■ Publication Order Forms .....432

■ Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades 434

□ Treadwear....434

□ Traction Grades ..... 4 3 4

□ Temperature Grades .... 4 3

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you're having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty, discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident, or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items, and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer's dealers have the facilities, factory-trained

technicians, special tools, and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to your dealer's service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership. They want to know if you need assistance.
• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the Manufacturer's Customer Center.

Any communication to the Manufacturer's Customer Center should include the following information:

• Owner's name and address
• Owner's telephone number (home and office)
• Dealership name

• Vehicle identification number
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P.O. Box 21-8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321-8004

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: [phone]

In Mexico contact:

Mexico, D. F. In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240

Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after your manufacturer's new vehicle limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's Service Contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's Service Contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about your service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's Service Contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's Service Contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's Service Contract, and you require service after your manufacturer's new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to your contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience. You'll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)

See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler's warranties applicable to this vehicle.

MOPAR® PARTS

Mopar ^® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from your dealer. They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada:

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9.

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form.

NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).

• Service Manuals.

These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.

Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations, these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

- Owner's Manuals.

These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.

Call Toll Free at:

• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)

Or

Visit us on the World Wide Web at:

• www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
• www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals

434 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following describes the tire grading categories established by the National highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your car.

All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements in Addition to These Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and

may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

INDEX

438 INDEX

Adding Fuel 329

Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142,387

Additives, Fuel 327

Adjustable Pedals 159

Air Conditioner Maintenance 383

Air Conditioning....251,256

Air Conditioning Controls 251

Air Conditioning Filter 269,384

Air Conditioning Refrigerant....383

Air Conditioning System ..... 251,256,259,383

Air Conditioning System, Zone Control ..... 2 5 2

Air Pressure, Tires 304

Airbag 50

Airbag Deployment 62

Airbag Light 54,55,64,79,197

Airbag Maintenance 64

Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) 5 1

Alarm (Security Alarm)....18

Alignment and Balance....3 11

All Wheel Drive (AWD)....284,400

Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ..... 7

Antenna, Satellite Radio 248

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) 390,391,416 Disposal 392

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) 153,288

Anti-Lock Warning Light 188

Anti-Theft System 18

Appearance Care 401

Auto Down Power Windows 32

Auto Up Power Windows 3 3

Automatic Dimming Mirror 86

Automatic Door Locks 27,28

Automatic Headlights 137

Automatic Oil Change Indicator ..... 192,202

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..... 259

Automatic Transaxle....12,278 Adding Fluid....4 1 8 Interlock System....15,280

INDEX 439

Reset Mode....280
Selection Of Lubricant ..... 398,418
Shifting 281
Special Additives....400
Automatic Transmission....398,400
Adding Fluid 399,400
Fluid and Filter Changes 400
Fluid Change 400
Fluid Level Check 399
Fluid Type 398
Autostick....145,281,282

Ball Joints 385
Battery 382
Gas Caution 382
Jump Starting 360
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ..... 2 4
Bearings 401
Belts, Drive 379

Body Mechanism Lubrication....386
B-Pillar Location 299
Brake Assist System 154
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5 4
Brake, Parking 285
Brake System 287,394
Anti-Lock (ABS)....153,288
Fluid Check 396,418
Hoses 395
Warning Light 189
Brakes 287,394
Brake/Transmission Interlock 279
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ..... 7 7
Bulb Replacement 412
Bulbs, Light 4 11

Calibration, Compass 207

Camera, Rear 166

Capacities, Fluid 416

Caps, Filler

Fuel 329

Oil (Engine) 378

Radiator (Coolant Pressure) 391

Car Washes 402

Carbon Monoxide Warning 328

Cargo Area Cover....176

Cargo Compartment

Luggage Carrier....178

Cargo Tie-Downs....177

Catalytic Converter 380

Caution, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,388

CD (Compact Disc) Changer ..... 218,228,232

CD (Compact Disc) Player ..... 212,216,222,226,232

CD (Compact Disc) Player Maintenance ..... 2 5 0

Cellular Phone 89,250

Chains, Tire 312

Changing A Flat Tire....3 5 2

Chart, Tire Sizing 296

Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator

Light)....193,373

Child Restraint 67,69

Child Restraint Tether Anchors ..... 71,74

Child Safety Locks 30

Child Seat 75

Clean Air Gasoline....3 2 6

Cleaning

Wheels 403

Climate Control 250

Clock....209

Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ..... 2 5 0

Compact Spare Tire 307

Compass 207

Compass Calibration 207

Compass Variance 207

Computer, Trip/Travel 208

Console 175

Console, Floor 175

INDEX 441

Console, Overhead 168

Contract, Service 430

Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ..... 3 9 1

Cooling System 389

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze)....391

Coolant Capacity 416

Coolant Level 389,392

Disposal of Used Coolant 392

Drain, Flush, and Refill 390

Inspection 392

Points to Remember 393

Pressure Cap 391

Radiator Cap 391

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..... 390,416,417

Cruise Control (Speed Control)....1 4 4

Cruise Light 193

Cup Holder....174,406

Customer Assistance....428

Data Recorder, Event 65

Dealer Service 375

Defroster, Rear Window ..... 2 6 9

Defroster, Windshield 79,256,265

Delay (Intermittent) Wipers 141

Diagnostic System, Onboard 372

Digital Video Disc (DVD) Player ..... 2 3 2

Dimmer Switch, Headlight ..... 1 3 9

Dipsticks

Automatic Transmission 399

Oil (Engine) 376

Disabled Vehicle Towing 363

Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) 392

Engine Oil 379

Door Ajar Light 197

Door Locks 26

Door Locks, Automatic 27

Door Opener, Garage 14

442 INDEX

Drive Belts 379

Drive Shaft Universal Joints ..... 3 8 6

Driving On Slippery Surfaces....291

Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water 292

DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) ..... 2 3 2

Electric Remote Mirrors 88

Electrical Power Outlets 172

Electronic Brake Control System....1 5 4 Brake Assist System....1 5 4

Electronic Stability Program....155

Traction Control System....154

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..... 1 4 4

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ..... 1 5 5

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)....166,199

Emergency, In Case of Hazard Warning Flasher....3 5 0 Jacking....3 5 2 Jump Starting....3 6 0 Overheating....3 5 1

Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . 373,420
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,370,371

Air Cleaner 380

Air Cleaner Filter 380

Block Heater 278

Break-In Recommendations 77

Checking Oil Level 376

Compartment....370,371

Coolant (Antifreeze) 417

Cooling 389

Exhaust Gas Caution 37,328

Flooded, Starting 277

Fuel Requirements....325,416 Oil....376,416,417

INDEX 443

Oil Change Interval....192,202,377

Oil Disposal 379

Oil Filler Cap 378

Oil Filter Disposal 379

Oil Selection....377,416

Oil Synthetic 378

Operation 77

Overheating....351

Temperature Gauge....187

Event Data Recorder....6 5

Exhaust Gas Caution 37,78,328,388

Exhaust System 388

Extender, Seat Belt 49

Exterior Folding Mirrors 87

Fabric Care 404,405

Filters

Air Cleaner....380

Air Conditioning....269,384

Automatic Transaxle 400

Engine Oil 379,417

Engine Oil Disposal 379

Flashers

Hazard Warning 350

Turn Signal 139,188,413,415

Flooded Engine Starting 277

Floor Console 175

Fluid Capacities 4 16

Fluid Leaks 80

Fluid Level Checks

Automatic Transmission 399

Brake 396,418

Power Steering 385,418

Fluids 417

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ..... 41 7

Fog Light Service 41 4

Fog Lights 138,194,414

Folding Rear Seat 12 6

444 INDEX

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle....362

Fuel 325

Adding....329

Additives....327

Clean Air 326

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) 329

Gasoline 325

Gauge....188

Hoses 397

Octane Rating 325,417

Requirements 325,416

Tank Capacity 416

Fuel System Caution 327

Fueling 329

Fuses 407

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) 146

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap)....329,330,373

Gasoline, Clean Air 326

Gasoline (Fuel) 325

Gasoline, Reformulated ..... 3 2 6

Gauges

Coolant Temperature 187

Fuel 188

Odometer 191

Speedometer 188

Tachometer....191

Gearshift 281

General Information....18,25,114,324

Glass Cleaning 405

Grocery Bag Retainer....128

Gross Axle Weight Rating 332,335

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . 332,334

Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) 89

Hazard

Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water 292

INDEX 445

Hazard Warning Flasher 350

Head Phones 241

Head Restraints....1 1 7

Headlights 4 1 3

Bulb Replacement 412

High Beam 139

High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..... 1 3 9

Passing....139

Replacing 412

Switch....136

Time Delay 138

Heated Seats 1 1 8

Heater 251

Heater, Engine Block 278

Hitches Trailer Towing....3 3 8

Holder, Cup 174

HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 146

Hood Release 133

Hoses 394,397

Ignition....12

Key 12

Ignition Key Removal 12

Illuminated Entry 20

Immobilizer (Sentry Key) 15

Indicator, Traction Control ..... 1 9 0

Infant Restraint 68,69

Information Center, Vehicle 199

Instrument Cluster....185,186,187

Instrument Panel and Controls ..... 1 8 4

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 405

Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 407

Interior Appearance Care 404

Interior Lights....135,136

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..... 1 4 1

Introduction 4

446 INDEX

Jack Location 352

Jack Operation....352,356

Jacking Instructions 356

Jump Starting 360

Key, Programming....17

Key, Replacement....16

Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) 1 5

Key-In Reminder 14

Keyless Entry System 20

Keys....12

Knee Bolster 5 5

Lane Change and Turn Signals ..... 1 3 9

Lap/Shoulder Belts 39

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for

CHildren)....71,74

Latches

Hood 133

Lead Free Gasoline 325

Life of Tires 309

Liftgate 34

Lights 80,134

Airbag 54,64,79,197

Anti-Lock....188

Automatic Headlights 137

Back-Up 415

Brake Warning 189

Bulb Replacement 411,412

Courtesy/Reading 134

Cruise 193

Daytime Running 138

Dimmer Switch, Headlight 136

Door Ajar....197

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

Indicator 156,158

Engine Temperature Warning....197

Fog 138,194,414

INDEX 447

Hazard Warning Flasher 350

Headlight Switch....136

Headlights....136,412,413

High Beam Indicator 193

Illuminated Entry 20

Instrument Cluster 136

Interior 136

License 415

Liftgate Ajar 197

Lights On Reminder 138

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..... 1 9 3

Oil Pressure 194

Park....413

Reading....168

Rear Servicing 415

Rear Tail....4 1 5

Seat Belt Reminder....194

Service....4 1 1,412

Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 193

Side Marker 415

Traction Control....156

Turn Signal 136,139,413,415

Voltage....187

Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ..... 1 8 7

Washer Fluid 197

Load Leveling System....180

Loading Vehicle 331,333

Capacities 3 3 3

Ti res 299

Locks

Door 26

Steering Wheel....14

Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren

(LATCH) 71,74

Lubrication, Body 386

Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) 178

Maintenance, Airbag 6 4

448 INDEX

Maintenance Free Battery 382

Maintenance Procedures 376

Maintenance Schedule 420

Maintenance, Sunroof 172

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .. 193,373

Manual, Service 432

Map/Reading Lights....168

Memory Feature (Memory Seat) ..... 1 2 9

Memory Seat 89,129

Mini-Trip Computer 208

Mirrors 86

Automatic Dimming 86

Electric Remote 88

Exterior Folding 87

Heated 89

Memory 129

Outside 87

Rearview....86

Vanity 89

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ..... 7

Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 4

Mopar Parts 375,431

Multi-Function Control Lever 136

Navigation System 166,244

New Vehicle Break-In Period 7 7

Occupant Restraints 38

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) 325

Odometer 191

Trip 191

Oil Change Indicator 192,202

Oil Change Indicator, Reset 192,202

Oil, Engine 376,417

Capacity 416

Change Interval....192,202,377

Checking 376

Disposal 379

INDEX 449

Filter 379,417
Filter Disposal 379
Identification Logo 378
Materials Added to 379
Recommendation....377,416
Synthetic 378
Viscosity 378,416
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,373
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) 146
Overdrive....281
Overhead Console 168
Overhead Travel Information Center ..... 1 6 8
Overheating, Engine 187,351
Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) 432

Panic Alarm 24

Park Sense System, Rear 160

Parking Brake 285

Parking On Hill 285

Passing Light....139
Pedals, Adjustable....159
Pets, Transporting....7 7
Phone, Cellular 89
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) 8 9
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ..... 2 9 9

Power

Brakes 287
Distribution Center (Fuses) 407
Door Locks 27
Lift Gate 35
Mirrors 88
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..... 1 7 2
Seats 115,116
Steering 290
Steering, Checking 385
Sunroof 169
Windows 32

Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 48,49

Preparation for Jacking 355

Pretensioners

Seat Belts 47

Programmable Electronic Features ..... 147,203

Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless

Entry)....24,147

Radial Ply Tires 306

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ..... 390,391

Radio Broadcast Signals 210

Radio Operation 250

Radio Remote Controls....235,249

Radio, Satellite 245

Radio (Sound Systems)....212,222

Rear Camera 166

Rear Liftgate....34

Rear Park Sense System....160

Rear Seating Flexibility 126

Rear Window Defroster 269

Rear Window Features....141

Rear Wiper/Washer 141

Rearview Mirrors 86

Reclining Front Seats 120

Recorder, Event Data 6 5

Recreational Towing....348,365

Reminder, Seat Belt 47

Remote Control 235

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) 2 0

Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ..... 2 4 9

Replacement Keys 16

Replacement Parts 375

Replacement Tires....3 1 0

Reporting Safety Defects 431

Resetting Oil Change Indicator ..... 192,202

Restraint, Head 11 7

Restraints, Child 67,75

Restraints, Infant 68

Retractable Cargo Area Cover....176

INDEX 451

Rocking Vehicle When Stuck....362

Roof Rack (Luggage Rack)....178

Rotation, Tires 3 1 3

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 79

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle....80

Safety Defects, Reporting 431

Safety, Exhaust Gas 37

Safety Information, Tire 294

Safety Tips 78

Satellite Radio 245

Satellite Radio Antenna 248

Schedule, Maintenance 4 2 0

Seat Belt Maintenance 406

Seat Belt Reminder 47

Seat Belts 38,39

Adjustable Shoulder Belt 4 4

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 4 4

And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,49

Child Restraint 67,69

Extender 49

Front Seat 39

Pretensioners 47

Rear Seat 39

Reminder 194

Untwisting Procedure....4 5

Seats 11 5

Adjustment 121

Cleaning 405

Easy Entry 123,132

Heated 11 8

Memory 129

Power....115,116

Reclining....120

Tilting 123

Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) 18

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) 390,417

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) 15

452 INDEX

Sentry Key Programming....17

Service Assistance 428

Service Contract 430

Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction

Indicator)....193

Service Manuals 432

Setting the Clock 209

Shoulder Belts 39

Signals, Turn....139,188,413,415

Slippery Surfaces, Driving On 291

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) 3 1 2

Snow Tires....3 1 3

Spare Tire 307,354

Spark Plugs 379

Speed Control (Cruise Control) 1 4 4

Speedometer....188

Starting 275

Automatic Transmission 276

Engine Fails to Start 277

Starting and Operating 275

Starting Procedures....275

Steering

Linkage 386

Power 290,385

Shaft Seal 385

Tilt Column 143

Wheel Lock 14

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System

Controls 249

Storage 175,410

Storage, Vehicle 268,410

Storing Your Vehicle 410

Sun Roof....169

Sun Visor Extension 89

Sunglasses Storage 168

Sunroof Maintenance 172

Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ..... 5 0

Synthetic Engine Oil 378

INDEX 453

System, Navigation ..... 2 4 4

Tachometer....191

Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..... 2 5 9

Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ..... 187,351

Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ..... 71,74

Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ..... 1 7 7

Tilt Steering Column 143

Tire and Loading Information Placard ..... 2 9 9

Tire Identification Number (TIN) 298

Tire Markings 294

Tire Safety Information 294

Tires 80,303,434

Aging (Life of Tires) 309

Air Pressure 303

Alignment....311

Chains 312

Changing 352

Compact Spare 307

General Information....303

High Speed 306

Inflation Pressures 304

Jacking 352

Life of Tires 309

Load Capacity 299,300

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)....3 1 4

Quality Grading 434

Radial 306

Replacement 310

Rotation 313

Safety 294,303

Sizes 296

Snow Tires 313

Spare Tire 354

Spinning 308

Tread Wear Indicators 309

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight 341

Towing 3 3 4

454 INDEX

Disabled Vehicle 363
Guide 338
Recreational 348,365
Weight 338
Traction Control....154,190
Traction Control Switch....154
Trailer Towing 3 3 4
Cooling System Tips 348
Hitches 338
Minimum Requirements....342
Trailer and Tongue Weight....341
Wiring....345
Trailer Towing Guide 3 3 8
Trailer Weight 338
Transaxle Automatic....12,278
Autostick....145,281,282
Overdrive....281
Selection of Lubricant....398,418

Transmission 398
Automatic 398
Filter 400
Fluid 398
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) 24
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) .. 146
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) 24
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..... 2 0
Transporting Pets 77
Tread Wear Indicators 309
Trip Odometer 191
Trip Odometer Reset Button 191
Turn Signals 139,188,413,415

UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) 89

Uniform Tire Quality Grades 434

Universal Joints 386

INDEX 455

Universal Transmitter ..... 1 4 6

Unleaded Gasoline 325

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ..... 4 5

Upholstery Care 404

Vanity Mirrors 89

Variance, Compass 207

Vehicle Certification Label 3 3 1

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 6

Vehicle Loading....300,331,333

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations 7

Vehicle Storage 268,410

Video Entertainment System (Rear Seat Video

System) 232

Warning Flasher, Hazard 350

Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . 187

Warnings and Cautions 6

Warranty Information 431

Washer, Adding Fluid ..... 142,387

Washers, Windshield 140

Washing Vehicle 402

Water

Driving Through 292

Wheel Alignment and Balance 3 11

Wheel and Wheel Trim....403

Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 403

Wheel Bearings 401

Wheel Nut Torque 360

Wind Buffeting 34,171

Window Fogging 268

Windows 32

Power 32

Windshield Washers 140,387

Windshield Wiper Blades 387

Windshield Wipers....140

Wiper Blade Replacement 387

Wiper, Rear 14

456 INDEX

Wipers, Intermittent ..... 1 4 1

Zone Control (Temperature Control) ..... 2 5 2

YES Essentials® Fabric Cleaning Procedure ..... 4 0 5